OWNER'S HANDBOOK

YOUR HANDBOOK
ON THE INTERNET!

CITROËN lets you view your vehicle's Connect to http://service.citroen.com:

documentation on line, to see earlier versions
and the latest information, simply and free 1 | Select your language and register,
of charge.

2 | click on the link in the "Private customer access" zone to consult

the vehicle documentation; a window opens providing access to all of
the handbooks,

3 | select your vehicle, choose the body type then the date of issue of
the handbook,

4 | finally, click on the heading of your choice.

We draw your attention to the following...

Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the equipment

described in this document, depending on the trim
level, version and the specifications for the country
in which it is sold.

CITROËN has a presence on every continent,

a complete product range,

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories
which are not recommended by CITROËN may
bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,
result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic sys- for a modern and creative approach to mobility.
tem. Please note this specific warning and contact
a CITROËN dealer to be shown the recommended We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.
equipment and accessories.

At the wheel of your new vehicle,

getting to know each system,

Key
each control, each setting,
! safety warning
makes your trips, your journeys
contributes to the protection of the environment more comfortable and more enjoyable.
refer to the page indicated
Happy motoring!
 CONTENTS

FAMILIARISATION 4 Î 23 III - COMFORT 49 Î 68 V - VISIBILITY 88 Î 99

„ Ventilation 49 „ Lighting controls 88

„ Mono-zone digital „ Automatic illumination of headlamps 90
air conditioning 51 „ Headlamp adjustment 91
ECO-DRIVING 24 Î 25
„ Dual-zone digital „ Directional lighting 92
air conditioning 54 „ Wiper controls 94
„ Programmable heating 58 „ Automatic rain sensitive
„ Front seats 62 windscreen wipers 95
I - MONITORING 26 Î 42 „ Rear seats 66 „ Courtesy lamps 96
„ Mirrors 67 „ Interior mood lighting 98
„ Instrument panels 26 „ Steering wheel adjustment 68
„ Trip computer 29
„ Warning and indicator lamps 32
„ Adjustment buttons 42 IV - ACCESS 69 Î 87 VI - FITTINGS 100 Î 106

„ Remote control key 69 „ Interior fittings 100

„ Alarm 75 „ Mats 101
„ Electric windows 77 „ Front armrest 101
II - MULTIFUNCTION „ Doors 79 „ Boot fittings 103
SCREENS 43 Î 48 „ Boot 81
„ Sunroof (Saloon) 84
„ Monochrome screen C 43
„ Panoramic sunroof (Tourer) 85
„ 16/9 colour screen (MyWay) 45
„ Fuel tank 86
„ 16/9 high definition colour screen
„ Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 87
(NaviDrive 3D) 47

VII - CHILD SAFETY 107 Î 115

„ Child seats 107

„ ISOFIX child seats 111
„ Child lock 115
 CONTENTS

XII - TECHNICAL
VIII - SAFETY 116 Î 127 X - CHECKS 163 Î 175 DATA 209 Î 224
„ Direction indicators 116 „ Bonnet 164 „ Petrol engines 209
„ Hazard warning lamps 116 „ Running out of fuel (Diesel) 166 „ Petrol weights 210
„ Horn 116 „ Petrol engines 167 „ Diesel engines 212
„ Emergency or assistance call 116 „ Diesel engines 169 „ Diesel weights 214
„ Tyre under-inflation detection 117 „ Checking levels 172 „ Diesel weights - commercial
„ Braking assistance systems 119 „ Checks 174 versions (Tourer) 218
„ Trajectory control systems 120 „ Dimensions 219
„ Seat belts 121 „ Identification markings 223
„ Airbags 124

XI - PRACTICAL XIII - AUDIO and

IX - DRIVING 128 Î 162 INFORMATION 176 Î 208 TELEMATICS 225 Î 324
„ Parking brake 128 „ Temporary puncture repair kit 176 „ Emergency or assistance 225
„ Electric parking brake 129 „ Changing a wheel 179 „ NaviDrive 3D 229
„ Hill start assist 136 „ Changing a bulb 183 „ MyWay 273
„ Manual gearbox 137 „ Changing a fuse 193 „ Audio system 305
„ Gear shift indicator 138 „ Battery 198
„ 6-speed electronic „ Energy economy mode 200
gearbox system 139 „ Towing the vehicle 201
„ Stop & Start 143 „ Towing a trailer 202
„ Automatic gearbox 146 „ Roof bars 203
„ Fixed centred controls steering „ Very cold protection 204
wheel 150 „ Cold climate screen 205 VISUAL
„ Speed limiter 152 „ Matt paint 206 SEARCH 325 Î 330
„ Cruise control 154 „ Accessories 207
„ Lane departure warning system 156
„ Parking space sensor 157
ALPHABETICAL
„ Parking sensors 159
INDEX 331 Î 336
„ "Hydractive III +" electronic
suspension 160
 EXTERIOR

Stop & Start Xenon dual-function directional Panoramic sunroof (Tourer)

This system puts the engine tempo- headlamps This roof provides you with perfect
rarily into standby during stops in the This system automatically provides brightness in the passenger com-
traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc...). you with extra visibility on bends. partment.
The engine restarts automatically as This lighting is linked with the cor- Sunroof (Saloon)
soon as you want to move off. nering lighting which maximises the
illuminated area at intersections and This also provides you with im-
Stop & Start reduces fuel consump- proved ventilation in the passenger
tion, exhaust emissions and noise when parking.
compartment.
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

when stationary. 91 84-85

143

Lane departure warning system Parking sensors (visual and Tyre under-inflation detection
This driving aid warns you when you audible) This system checks the pressure
unwittingly cross a lane marking. This system warns you if an obstacle of the tyres automatically while
is detected in front of or behind the driving.
vehicle.

156 159 117

4
 ACCESS
Remote control key Opening the boot Fuel tank

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
A. Unfolding/folding the key. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the
B. Normal locking of the vehicle (a sin- top left corner, then pull from the edge.
gle press) or deadlocking the vehicle
(two presses in succession).
C. Guide-me-home lighting. Locking filler cap
D. Unlocking the vehicle.
) Turn the key a quarter turn to lock or
unlock the filler cap.
) Press upwards on lever E. When refuelling, place the cap on hook F.
Tank capacity: approximately 71 litres.
69 The boot automatically locks when the
vehicle is moving at a speed of over
6 mph (10 km/h), even if automatic cen-
tral locking is deactivated. It is unlocked 86
when a door is opened or when the cen-
tral locking button is pressed (speed
lower than 6 mph (10 km/h)).

81-82

5
 ACCESS
Opening the bonnet Spare wheel Access to the spare wheel
To access the spare wheel:
) Lift up the boot floor and fold it in
two (Saloon) or secure it using the
retractable grip (Tourer).
) Attach the hook to the top of the
boot.
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

) To remove the spare wheel, detach

the strap then push the wheel for-
wards, before lifting it out.

The bonnet release should only be ope- Saloon Temporary puncture repair kit
rated when the vehicle is stationary.
) Open the left hand front door.
) Pull release lever A to unlock the
bonnet.

Tourer The kit is a complete system comprised

of a compressor and a sealant car-
The tools are located in a protective tridge.
holder inside the spare wheel.
) Lift safety catch B, then raise the 176
bonnet.
164 179
6
 INTERIOR

Dual-zone digital air conditioning Audio and communication systems

This air conditioning system provides inde- These systems benefit from the latest techno-
pendent adjustment of the comfort levels for logy: MP3 compatible radio, Bluetooth® system,
the driver and front passenger. NaviDrive 3D, MyWay.

54 225

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
Electric parking brake Parking space sensor
The electric parking brake combines automatic application when the The "Parking space sensor"
engine is switched off, and automatic release when the vehicle is set in system assists you in finding a
motion (automatic function activated by default). parking space.
Manual application/release is possible.
129 157

7
 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Electric windows/door mirrors/child safety controls.
2. Storing driver’s seat and door mirror settings.
3. Audio/telematic steering mounted controls.
4. Horn.
5. Steering mounted controls:
- Speed limiter
- Cruise control
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

6. Driver’s airbag.
7. Navigation controls for the audio/telematic and trip
computer systems.
8. Driver’s air vent.
9. Instrument panel.
10. Driver’s air vent.
11. Stop & Start switch.
12. Lighting/Direction indicators/Foglamp/Voice
recognition control stalk.
13. Manual headlamp height adjustment.
14. Steering wheel adjustment.
15. Knee airbag.
16. Locking/unlocking of doors and boot.
17. Checks/Anti-intrusion alarm/Parking space sensor
controls.
18. Ignition switch.
19. Windscreen wiper/screenwash control stalk.
20. Oddments tray or programmable heater controls.
21. USB port.

8
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Sunshine sensor.
2. Soft diffusion air conditioning adjustment wheel.
3. Passenger’s airbag.
4. Side window demist vent.
5. Passenger’s air vents.
6. Bonnet release.
7. Hazard warning lamps switch.

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
8. Switch in the glove box:
- Passenger’s airbag activation/deactivation
9. Glove box:
- Vehicle document storage
- Audio-video sockets
- Fusebox access flap
10. ESP/Parking Sensors/Lane Departure Warning
System controls.
11. Suspension controls:
- Ground clearance adjustment
- Sport mode
12. Armrest with cup-holder.
13. Electric parking brake.
14. Automatic gearbox SPORT/SNOW mode controls.
15. Ashtray with cigar lighter.
16. Gear lever.
17. Storage.
18. Audio and telematics system.
19. Air conditioning controls.
20. Storage.
21. Multifunction screen.
22. Emergency or assistance call controls.

9
 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instrument panel menu. Multifunction screen menu.

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

Activation of voice MODE: selection of the type

recognition or reminder of of information displayed in
navigation guidance. the multifunction screen.

Cruise control and speed

limiter. Audio.

The "SET +, PAUSE, VOL+, and MUTE"

buttons have touch identification to
Telephone. make them easier to use.

150-151
10
 S I T T I N G C O M F O R TA B LY
Front seats Seat belt height adjustment
Manual adjustments Electrical adjustments

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
The correct position for the upper seat
1. Seat cushion height, angle and slide belt anchorage places the belt across
adjustments. the middle of the shoulder.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle. ) To adjust the seat belt for height,
3. Adjustment of top of backrest. compress the control and slide it in
4. Adjustment of lumbar support height the desired direction.
and level.
5. Massage function. 122
6. Heated seat control.

63
A. Adjustment of the backrest angle.
Storing settings
B. Adjustment of the seat height.
C. Heated seat control. This function allows you to programme
D. Longitudinal adjustment of seat. and store the driver’s seat and the air
conditioning settings.
E. Adjustment of the backrest lumbar
support.
65
62
11
 S I T T I N G C O M F O R TA B LY
Electric door mirrors Electro-chromatic rear view Steering wheel adjustment
mirror
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

1. Selection of door mirror: Automatic day/night model ) Release the steering wheel by push-
A. Left. 1. Automatic detection of day/night ing control A forwards.
B. Right. mode. ) Adjust the height and the reach of
2. Mirror adjustment. the steering wheel, then lock the po-
C. Fold/Unfold. sition by pulling the lever upwards.
2. Adjustment control for mirror se-
lected. 68

67 68

As a safety precaution, these opera-

tions must not be carried out while
moving.

12
 VISIBILITY
Lighting Front wipers Rear wiper (Tourer)

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
Ring A

Lighting off.
Control stalk positions ) Rotate control C to the desired position.
Automatic illumination of head- 2 Fast wipe.
lamps. 1 Normal wipe.
I Intermittent wipe. Off
Sidelamps. 0 Off.

One press downwards:

Dipped/main beam. Intermittent wipe
- Auto: Automatic rain sensitive wipers
activated.
) Pull the control stalk towards you - Single wipe.
to change between dipped and main
beam. Screenwash
If the ignition has been switched off for
around 1 minute, automatic wiping must
Ring B be selected again. 94

Front foglamps on.

Screenwash
) Pull the screen wipe control stalk
Front and rear foglamps on. towards you.
88 94-95
13
 V E N T I L AT I O N
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
Adjustment of temperature
on driver’s side.

Front demisting - Adjustment of air flow.

defrosting.
Adjustment of air distribution
on driver’s side.
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

Activation/deactivation of
Adjustment of temperature air conditioning.
on passenger’s side.

Passenger’s side
automatic operation.

Driver’s side automatic

operation.
Adjustment of air distribution
on passenger’s side.

Rear screen and door mirrors Air recirculation - fresh air

demisting - defrosting. intake.

Use of automatic mode is recommended by pressing the "AUTO" button.

54
14
 MONITORING
Instrument panel

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
A. Fuel gauge and low fuel warning lamp. G. Trip mileage recorder reset button.
B. Cruise control/speed limiter information. H. Rev counter.
C. Coolant temperature. I. Engine oil temperature.
D. Speedometer. J. Automatic gearbox information.
E. Instrument panel screen.
F. Mileage recorder.
26

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps
can also be used with the
ignition switched off. - When the ignition is switched on, the orange and
red warning lamps come on.
116 - When the engine is running, these warning lamps
should go off.
- If any warning lamps remain on, refer to the
"Monitoring" section.

15
 MONITORING
Tyre under-inflation detection Economy mode
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

After switching off the engine, some sys-

tems (radio, wipers, electric windows,
opening roof, electric seats, telephone,
video, interior lighting, motorised tail-
gate, etc.) are supplied electrically for a
The tyre under-inflation detection sys- maximum of no more than around one
tem is a driving aid which informs you hour, so as to avoid discharging the
of the state of your tyres. battery.
It does not replace either vigilance or
responsibility on the part of the driver.
Once this period is over, a message is
displayed in the instrument panel screen
117 and the active functions are placed on
standby.
These functions will be automatically
reactivated when the vehicle is restarted.

This period may be reduced considerably

if the battery’s state of charge is low.

200

16
 PA S S E N G E R S A F E T Y
Seat belts and front Front passenger’s airbag Child lock
passenger’s airbag deactivation

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
The seat belt fastened/unfastened sta-
tus for each seat category is indicated
by the illumination or flashing of the To use a rear facing child seat in the front This deactivates the controls in the rear
warning lamps for each position: passenger’s seat position, the passenger’s of the vehicle, both for the rear windows
A. Not fastened/unfastened front and/ airbag must first be deactivated. and for opening the rear doors from the
or rear seat belts warning lamp. To do this: inside. The electric child safety device is
B. Front left-hand seat belt warning lamp. activated by pressing button J.
) With the ignition switched off, insert
C. Front right-hand seat belt warning the key into the switch I. The activation of the function is indicated
lamp. by a message on the instrument panel
) Turn the key to the "OFF" position; the screen and the lamp on button J.
D. Rear right-hand seat belt warning passenger’s airbag is deactivated.
lamp. The front passenger’s airbag deactiva-
E. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp. tion warning lamp G comes on when
the ignition is switched on. 115
F. Rear left-hand seat belt warning
lamp.
G. Front passenger’s airbag deactiva- 125
tion warning lamp.
H. Front passenger’s airbag activation
warning lamp.

35, 37-38

17
 DRIVING
Electric parking brake Hill start assist
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

Automatic operation Manual operation

The electric parking brake releases The MANUAL application/release of
automatically and progressively when the parking brake is always possible To aid starting on a gradient, your vehicle
you press the accelerator. With the by pulling/pushing the control lever B, is equipped with a system which keeps
vehicle stationary, the parking brake keeping your foot on the brake pedal. it immobilised for a short time (about
is automatically applied when the 2 seconds), the approximate time it
engine is switched off. takes to move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal.
This system is only active when:
- The vehicle is completely stationary,
Before leaving the ve- Before leaving the ve- with your foot on the brake pedal.
hicle, check that warn- hicle, check that warn- - In certain conditions on a gradient.
ing lamp A (!) (red) in ing lamp A (!) (red) in
the instrument panel is the instrument panel is - With the driver’s door closed.
on fixed (not flashing) and that warn- on fixed (not flashing) and that warn-
ing lamp P (red) in the control lever B ing lamp P (red) in the control lever B
is on. is on.

Never leave a child alone inside If you leave the vehicle with the Do not leave the vehicle while
! the vehicle with the ignition ! engine still running, apply the ! it is being held in the temporary
on, as they could release the parking brake manually. immobilisation hill start assist
parking brake. phase.
129

130 136
18
 DRIVING
Speed limiter Cruise control Instrument panel screen

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
This system allows you to choose a maximum This system allows you to maintain a
speed that you do not wish to exceed. constant vehicle speed programmed by
the driver.
The speed limiter or cruise control
Selection of "LIMIT": Activation mode is displayed in the instrument
of speed limiter mode. Selection of "CRUISE": Activation panel screen when selected.
of cruise control mode.

"SET +": Increase the maximum "SET": Memorisation

speed. of the speed (system
paused).
Speed limiter
"SET -": Reduce the maximum
speed. "SET +": Increase the memo-
rised speed (system ON).

Suspension or resumption of Cruise control

mode. "SET -": Reduce the memorised
speed (system ON).
Deactivation.
The chosen speed is memorised. Suspension or resumption of
mode.

The chosen speed must be higher Cruise control is active on the higher
than 20 mph (30 km/h). Deactivation. gears of the gearbox. The chosen
speed must be higher than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
152 154
19
 DRIVING
Direction indicators - Ignition switch
"Motorway" function
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

) Move the stalk briefly upwards or ● S: Steering lock

downwards, without going beyond To release the steering, turn the
the point of resistance; the direction steering wheel slightly while turning
indicators will flash 3 times. the key, but without forcing.
● M: Ignition on, drive position
116 ● D: Starter
Release the key as soon as the en-
gine starts. Do not operate the start-
er when the engine is running.

72

20
 DRIVING
6-speed electronic Automatic gearbox
gearbox system
The automatic gearbox offers:
- Operation in auto-active mode,
with automatic adaptation to your
style of driving as well as to the road
profile (Position D).
- Operation in sequential mode, with

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
manual gear changing (Position M).
- Operation in automatic SPORT mode
(Position D) and press button A.
- Operation in automatic SNOW mode
(Position D) and press button B.

R Reverse Positions
N Neutral P: Park.
A Automated mode R: Reverse. ! For safety:
M Manual mode N: Neutral. The gear lever can only be disen-
Using the paddles 1 "+" and 2 "-": D: Automatic mode. gaged from position P if you are
- changing gear in manual mode, pressing the brake pedal.
M: Sequential mode.
- taking temporary manual control in When a door is opened, there is an
automated mode. audible signal if the gear lever is not
in position P.
In all circumstances, ensure that
SPORT programme that position P is selected before
leaving the vehicle.
) With the lever in A and the engine
running, press button 3.

139-142 146
21
 DRIVING
Stop & Start Deactivation/Reactivation

Going into engine STOP mode Going into engine START mode

The "ECO" warning lamp comes

on in the instrument panel and The "ECO" warning lamp goes
the engine goes into standby: off and the engine restarts:
FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N

- with the 6-speed electronic gear- - with the gear lever in position A
box system; at speeds below 4 mph or M, release the brake pedal,
(6 km/h), press the brake pedal or
put the gear lever into position N. - or with the gear lever in position N
and the brake pedal released, move
to position A or M,
- or engage reverse.
In certain circumstances, the STOP You can deactivate the system at any
mode may not be available; the "ECO" time by pressing the "ECO OFF" button;
warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, the button’s warning lamp comes on.
then goes off.

143
In certain circumstances, START mode
may be invoked automatically; the "ECO"
warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, The system is reactivated automatically
then goes off. every time you start the engine with
the key.

144
Before refuelling or doing anything
under the bonnet, you must switch off
the ignition with the key.

144

22
 DRIVING
Parking space sensor Parking sensors (visual and Lane departure warning system
audible)

FA M I L I A R I S AT I O N
You can select the "Parking space You can activate/deactivate the parking Use of this system is recommended on
sensor" by pressing button A, with the sensors by pressing button B. When motorways and dual carriageways, and
direction indicator activated on the side of the parking sensors are inactive, the operates only at speeds above 50 mph
the space to be measured, a speed lower warning lamp in button B comes on. (80 km/h).
than 12 mph (20 km/h) and at a distance Pressing button C activates the system,
of less than 1.5 metres from the space. the warning lamp in the button comes
The fixed illumination of the warning 159 on.
lamp indicates that the function is
selected.

157

The system does not alert you if one

of your direction indicators is operating
and for approximately 20 seconds after
the direction indicator has stopped.

156

23
 ECO-DRIVING
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your Control the use of your
gearbox electrical equipment
With a manual gearbox, move off gently, Before moving off, if the passenger Avoid running the engine before mo-
change up without waiting and drive by compartment is too warm, ventilate it ving off, particularly in winter; your
changing up quite soon. If your vehicle by opening the windows and air vents vehicle will warm up much faster while
has the system, the gear efficiency before using the air conditioning. driving.
indicator invites you to change up; it is Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the
displayed in the instrument panel, follow windows and leave the air vents open.
its instructions. As a passenger, if you avoid connecting
Remember to make use of equipment your multimedia devices (film, music,
that can help keep the temperature in video game...), you will contribute
the passenger compartment down (sun towards limiting the consumption of
roof and window blinds...). electrical energy, and so of fuel.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, Switch off the air conditioning, unless Disconnect your portable devices
stay in Drive "D" or Auto "A", according it has automatic digital regulation, as before leaving the vehicle.
to the type of gearbox, without pressing soon as the desired temperature is
the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls, if not automatic.
Drive smoothly Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
Maintain a safe distance between
vehicles, use engine braking rather than
the brake pedal, and press the acce- Switch off the headlamps and front
lerator progressively. These practices foglamps when the level of light does
contribute towards a reduction in fuel not require their use.
consumption and CO2 emissions and
also helps reduce the background traffic
noise.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make

use of the system at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is
flowing well.

24
Limit the causes of excess Observe the recommendations
consumption on maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; Check the tyre pressures regularly, When refuelling, do not continue after
place the heaviest items in the bottom when cold, referring to the label in the the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid
of the boot, as close as possible to the door aperture, driver's side. any overflow.
rear seats. Carry out this check in particular:
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle - before a long journey,
and reduce wind resistance (roof bars,
roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use - at each change of season,
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
a roof box in preference. - after a long period out of use. it is only after the first 1 800 miles
Remove roof bars and roof racks after Don't forget the spare wheel and the (3 000 kilometres) that you will see
use. tyres on any trailer or caravan. the fuel consumption settle down to a
consistent average.

At the end of winter, remove snow

tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly
(engine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and
observe the schedule of operations
recommended by the manufacturer.

25
 MONITORING

INSTRUMENT PANELS - PETROL AND DIESEL - MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC GEARBOX

Panel grouping together the dials and vehicle operation indicator and warning lamps.
A. Fuel gauge E. Indicator: G. Instrument panel screen indicating:
B. Indicator: ● Engine oil temperature ● Depending on the page
● Coolant temperature ● Gear lever position and gear selected with the left-hand
engaged (Automatic gearbox) thumb wheel on the steering
● Cruise control/Speed limiter wheel:
information F. Controls:
- Digital speed repeater
C. Speedometer ● Lighting dimmer
- Trip computer
D. Rev counter ● Resetting to zero of trip mile- - Navigation (guidance) infor-
age computer and mainte- mation
nance indicator
- Display of message alerts
- Engine oil level check
- Service indicator
● Permanently:
- Trip mileage recorder
- Total mileage recorder

26
 MONITORING

The main menu allows you to pro-

gramme certain vehicle and instru- I
ment panel screen functions:

"Choice of language" menu

This allows you to choose the display
and voice recognition language.

Main menu
The instrument screen A is located in
the centre of the instrument panel.
- With the vehicle stationary, you
can access the main menu of
the screen by quickly pressing
on the left-hand thumb wheel B
on the steering wheel.
- Whilst driving, the message "Choice of units" menu "Vehicle parameters" menu
"Action impossible whilst
driving" is displayed on the in- This allows you to choose metric or This allows you to access the pa-
strument panel if you try to open imperial units. rameters relating to:
the main menu. - The vehicle lighting.
- The comfort levels in the vehicle.

27
 MONITORING

"Lighting" menu "Comfort" menu

Once you have selected this menu, Once you have selected this menu,
you can: you can:
) Activate/deactivate the lighting ) Activate/deactivate the driver's
of the daytime running lamps*. welcome lighting function.
) Activate/deactivate the guide- ) Select unlocking of all the doors
me-home lighting and adjust its or just the driver's door.
duration. ) Activate/deactivate automatic
) Activate/deactivate the dual- operation of the electric parking
function Xenon directional head- brake.
lamps.

* Depending on country.
28
 MONITORING

TRIP COMPUTER The trip computer is displayed in the Trip zero reset
instrument panel screen. I
System which provides current in- ) Turn the left-hand thumb wheel A
formation concerning your journey on the steering wheel to display
(range, consumption, etc.) the various trip computer tabs in
succession:
- the current information tab is
displayed in zone B of the in-
strument panel screen, with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the digital speed reading or
the Stop & Start time counter.
) When the trip required is dis-
- the trip "1" tab is displayed in played, press the left-hand thumb
zone C of the instrument panel wheel on the steering wheel for
screen, with: more than two seconds.
Information displays ● the distance travelled, Trips "1" and "2" are independent
● the average fuel consumption, but their use is identical.
● the average speed, For example, trip "1" can be used for
for the first trip. daily figures and trip "2" for monthly
figures.
- the trip "2" tab is displayed in
zone C of the instrument panel
screen, with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.

29
 MONITORING

A few definitions… Current fuel consumption Distance travelled

I (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (miles or km)
Range
(miles or km) This is the average fuel consump- This indicates the distance travelled
tion during the last few seconds. since the last trip computer zero reset.

This indicates the distance which

can still be travelled with the fuel re-
maining in the tank in relation to the
average fuel consumption over the Stop & Start time
last few miles (kilometres) travelled. This function is only displayed from counter
20 mph (30 km/h). (minutes/seconds or hours/
minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop &
This value may vary following a Start, a time counter calculates the
change in the style of driving or time spent in STOP mode during a
the relief, resulting in a significant Average fuel journey.
change in the current fuel con- consumption
sumption. It resets to zero every time the igni-
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) tion is switched on with the key.

When the range falls below 20 miles This is the average fuel consump-
(30 km), dashes are displayed. After tion since the last trip computer zero
filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, reset.
the range is recalculated and is dis-
played when it exceeds 60 miles
(100 km).
Average speed
(mph or km/h)

If dashes are displayed continu-

ously while driving in place of the This is the average speed calculat-
digits, contact a CITROËN dealer ed since the last trip computer zero
or a qualified workshop. reset (ignition on).

30
 MONITORING

Return to the main instrument

panel screen display I
Successive rotations of the left-hand
thumb wheel on the steering wheel
allow you to return to the main instrument
panel screen display (vehicle speed),
via the navigation information screen,
then the screen displaying only the total
mileage and the trip mileage (bottom of
screen).

Log of alerts
This function allows you to display
the log of alerts.
) Press on button A.
The following messages appear
consecutively on the instrument
panel screen:
- Tyre pressure check.
- Service indicator reminder.
- Display of message alerts.
- Oil level check.

Display of navigation
information on instrument
panel screen
You can display navigation informa-
tion on the instrument panel screen
by rotating the left-hand thumb
wheel on the steering wheel.

31
 MONITORING

Warning and indicator lamps Warning lamps

I When the engine is running or the
Visual indicators which inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction or vehicle is being driven, the illumina-
fault (warning lamp) or of the operation of a system (operation or deactivation tion of one of the following warning
indicator lamp). lamps indicates a malfunction or
When the ignition is switched on fault which requires action on the
Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. part of the driver.
When the engine is started, these warning lamps should go off. The illumination of a warning lamp is
always accompanied by the display
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information for the warning of an additional message, to assist
lamp concerned. you in identifying the fault.
Associated warnings If you encounter any problems, con-
tact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
The illumination, fixed or flashing, of certain warning lamps may be accompa- workshop.
nied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

fixed, associated It is associated with a Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

STOP with another punctured tyre or the engine Park, switch off the ignition and call a
warning lamp. coolant temperature. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Identify the fault by reading the message

shown in the screen, such as, for example:
- the closing of the doors, boot, rear
screen or bonnet,
A minor fault has occurred - the remote control battery,
temporarily. for which there is no specific
warning lamp. - the tyre pressures,
- saturation of the particle emission filter
Service (Diesel).
For any other faults, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.

A major fault has occurred Identify the fault by reading the message
fixed. for which there is no specific shown in the screen and contact a
warning lamp. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
32
 MONITORING

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations I

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by
fixed, associated CITROËN.
The braking system fluid level
with the STOP is too low. If the problem persists, have the system
warning lamp.
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
Braking qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
The electronic brake force
with the STOP distribution (EBFD) system Have it checked by a CITROËN or a
and ABS warning has a fault. qualified workshop.
lamp.

Anti-lock The vehicle retains conventional braking.

Braking The anti-lock braking system Drive carefully at reduced speed and
fixed.
System has a fault. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
(ABS) workshop without delay.

The electric parking brake is You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Electric not applied automatically. Park on flat level ground, switch off the
flashing.
parking brake The application/release is ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or
faulty. a qualified workshop.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop without delay.
Electric The parking brake can be released
Alone, the electric parking
parking brake fixed. manually.
brake has a fault.
fault For more information on the electric
parking brake, refer to the "Driving"
section.
33
 MONITORING

I Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

Activate the function (according to country)

via the vehicle configuration menu or
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Deactivation of The "automatic application" workshop if automatic application/release is
the automatic (on switching off the engine) not possible.
functions of fixed. and "automatic release" The parking brake can be released
the electric functions are deactivated or manually using the emergency release
parking brake faulty. procedure.
For more information on the electric parking
brake, refer to the "Driving" section.

The system optimises traction and

The ESP/ASR regulation is
flashing. improves the directional stability of
active. the vehicle.
Dynamic
stability
control fixed, accompanied Unless it has been deactivated
(ESP/ASR) by an audible signal with the indicator lamp in Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
and a message in the button on, the ESP/ASR qualified workshop.
the instrument panel system has a fault.
screen.

The warning lamp should go off when

The emission control system the engine is started.
fixed. has a fault. If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN
Engine
autodiagnosis dealer or qualified workshop without delay.
system
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
The engine management
flashing. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
system has a fault.
a qualified workshop.

fixed, accompanied
Brake pad by an audible signal The brake pads are at an Have the brake pads replaced by a
wear and a message in advanced state of wear. CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
the multifunction
screen.
34
 MONITORING

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations I

You must refuel as soon as possible to
avoid running out of fuel.
This warning lamp wil come on every time
When it first comes on there the ignition is switched on, until a sufficient
Low fuel addition of fuel is made.
fixed. remains approximately
level 5 litres of fuel in the tank. Fuel tank capacity: 71 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out
of fuel, this could damage the emission
control and injection systems.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Maximum Wait until the engine has cooled down
The temperature of the
coolant fixed red. before topping up the level, if necessary.
cooling system is too high.
temperature If the problem persists, contact a
CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.

The battery charging circuit The warning lamp should go off when the
Battery has a fault (dirty or loose engine is started.
fixed.
charge terminals, slack or cut If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN
alternator belt, ...). dealer or a qualified workshop.

Seat belt not

fastened/ fixed. Pull the strap then insert the tongue in
unfastened the buckle.

The illuminated dots represent the not

+ The driver and/or the front/ fastened/unfastened passengers.
fixed, associated rear passenger has not They come on:
Seat belts with the seat belt fastened or has unfastened - fixed for 30 about seconds on starting the
not fastened/ not fastened/ their seat belt. vehicle,
unfastened unfastened - fixed from 0 to 12 mph (0 to 20 km/h) when
warning lampl. driving,
- flashing above 12 mph (20 km/h), accompanied
by an audible signal for about 120 seconds.
35
 MONITORING

Operation indicator lamps

I If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
It may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

Left-hand flashing with

direction The lighting stalk is pushed down.
buzzer.
indicator
Right-hand flashing with
direction The lighting stalk is pushed up.
buzzer.
indicator

Hazard The hazard warning lamps switch, The left-hand and right-hand direction
flashing with
warning located on the dashboard, has been indicators and their associated
audible signal.
lamps operated. indicator lamps flash simultaneously.

The lighting stalk is in the

Sidelamps fixed. "Sidelamps" position.

Dipped beam The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

fixed.
headlamps beam headlamps" position.

Main beam Pull the stalk to return to dipped

fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards you.
headlamps beam headlamps.

Front Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards

fixed. The front foglamps are switched on.
foglamps twice to switch off the front foglamps.

Rear Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards

fixed. The rear foglamps are switched on.
foglamps to switch off the rear foglamps.

36
 MONITORING

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations I

Wait until the warning lamp has
Diesel engine The ignition switch is at the switched off before starting.
fixed.
pre-heating 2nd position (ignition on). The duration for which the warning lamp is
on is determined by the climatic conditions.

The parking brake is applied or not Release the parking brake to switch
fixed. properly released. off the warning lamp, keeping your
foot on the brake pedal.
Parking Observe the safety recommendations.
brake
The parking brake is not fully For further information on the
flashing. applied or is released. parking brake, refer to the "Driving"
section.

The control switch, located in the

glove box, is in the "ON" position. Turn the control switch to the "OFF"
Passenger's position to deactivate the front
The passenger's front airbag is passenger's airbag.
airbag fixed. activated.
system In this case you can install a rear-
In this case, do not install a rear- facing child seat.
facing child seat.

When the vehicle stops (red lights, The warning lamp goes off and the
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start engine restarts automatically in
fixed. system has put the engine into START mode, as soon as you want
STOP mode. to move off.

Stop & Start

STOP mode is temporarily
flashes for a few unavailable. Refer to "Driving - § Stop & Start"
seconds, then or for special cases with STOP mode
goes off. START mode is invoked and START mode.
automatically.

37
 MONITORING

Deactivation indicator lamps

I If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.

Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations

The control, located in the

glove box, is set to the OFF
position. Set the control to the ON position to
Passenger's activate the passenger's front airbag.
airbag fixed. The passenger's front airbag
system is deactivated. In this case, do not fit a child seat in the
rear-facing position.
In this case you can install a
"rear facing" child seat.

The button, located in the middle Press the button to activate the ESP/ASR.
of the dashboard, is pressed. Its indicator lamp switches off.
Its indicator lamp is on. The ESP/ASR system is activated
ESP/ASR fixed. The ESP/ASR is deactivated. automatically when the vehicle is started.
ESP: electronic stability If deactivated, the system is reactivated
programme. automatically from approximately 30 mph
ASR: anti-skid regulation. (50 km/h).

38
 MONITORING

Service indicator Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) Service overdue
remain before the next service is due For 7 seconds after the ignition is I
This information is displayed for a Example: 500 miles (900 km) re- switched on, the spanner flashes
few seconds when the ignition is main before the next service is due. to indicate that the service must be
switched on. It informs the driver carried out as soon as possible.
when the next service is due, in ac- For 7 seconds after the ignition is
cordance with the manufacturer's switched on, the central screen in- Example: the service is overdue by
servicing schedule. dicates: 180 miles (300 km).
The point at which the service is due For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched
is calculated from the last indicator on, the central screen indicates:
zero reset. It is determined by two
parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last
service.
The spanner remains on in the
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) screen to indicate that a service The spanner remains on in the
remain before the next service is due must be carried out soon. screen to indicate that a service
When the ignition is switched on, should have been carried out.
no service information appears on
the instrument panel central screen.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For 7 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the spanner symbolising
the service operations comes on. The
instrument panel central screen indi-
cates the distance remaining before
the next service is due.
Example: 1 900 miles (2 800 km) The distance remaining may be
remain before the next service is due. weighted by the time factor, de-
For 7 seconds after the ignition is switched pending on the driver's driving
on, the central screen indicates: habits.
Therefore, the spanner may also
come on if you have exceeded the
two year service interval.

39
 MONITORING

Service indicator zero reset Engine oil level indicator Oil level gauge fault
I
System which informs the driver
whether the engine oil level is correct
or not.
This information is indicated for a
few seconds when the ignition is This is indicated by displaying of the
switched on, after the service infor- message "Oil level measurement in-
mation. valid". Contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
The level read will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more
than 15 minutes.

After each service, the service indi-

cator must be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero
is as follows: Oil level correct
) switch off the ignition,
) press and hold the trip distance
recorder zero reset button,
) switch on the ignition; the dis-
tance recorder display begins a
countdown,
) when the display indicates "=0", Oil level incorrect
release the button; the spanner
disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish
to disconnect the battery, lock the
vehicle and wait at least five minutes
for the zero reset to be taken into This is indicated by displaying of the
account. message "Oil level incorrect".
If the low oil level is confirmed by a
check using the dipstick, it is essen-
tial that the level is topped up to pre-
vent damage to the engine.

40
 MONITORING

Engine oil temperature gauge Coolant temperature gauge Fuel gauge

I

Under normal operating conditions, Under normal operating conditions, On horizontal ground, illumination of
the bars should be within section 1. the bars should be within section 1. the fuel low warning lamp indicates
In severe operating conditions, the In severe operating conditions, the that you are at the reserve level.
bars may extend into section 2. bars may extend into section 2, the An alert message is displayed in the
In this event, slow down, and if neces- engine coolant temperature warning instrument panel.
sary, stop the engine and check the lamp A and the STOP warning lamp
levels (see corresponding section). come on, stop as soon as it is safe
to do so. Switch off the ignition. The
cooling fan may continue to oper-
ate for a certain time.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the SERVICE warning lamp comes
on, check the levels (see corre-
sponding chapter).

41
 MONITORING

Total distance recorder Lighting dimmer Deactivation

I When the lighting is off, or in day
System which measures the total System for manual adjustment of mode on vehicles fitted with daytime
distance travelled by the vehicle the brightness of the instruments running lamps, pressing the buttons
during its life. and controls in relation to the exte- does not have any effect.
The total and trip distances are dis- rior brightness.
played for thirty seconds when the
ignition is switched off, when the
driver's door is opened and when
the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

In order to observe legislation,

change the units of distance (miles
or km) to those for the country you
are passing through, using the con-
figuration menu.

Trip distance recorder

System which measures a distance Operation
travelled during a day or other pe- ) Press button A to decrease the
riod since it was reset to zero by the brightness of the instruments
driver. and controls.
) Press button B to increase the
brightness of the instruments
and controls.

) With the ignition on, press the

button until zeros appear.

42
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

MONOCHROME SCREEN C Controls Main Menu

Presentation Press on the button A to view the

Main Menu of the multifunction
screen. This menu gives you access II
to the following functions:

Personalisation -
Configuration

1. Time This permits activation/deactivation of the:

2. Ambient temperature - brightness and contrast of the
3. Date and display zone multifunction screen,
When the outside temperature is - date and time,
between +3 °C and -3 °C, the tem- - units of the outside temperature
perature display flashes (ice risk). displayed.
The ambient temperature displayed
may be greater than the actual tem- Radio-CD
perature, if the vehicle is parked in
bright sunlight. (see "Audio and Telematics"
chapter)
A. Access to the "Main Menu" Bluetooth® system
B. Cancellation of the operation or
return to the previous display (see "Audio and Telematics"
C. Scrolling in the screen menus chapter)
Confirmation at the steering
wheel
D. Confirmation on the audio equip-
ment control panel

It is recommended that the driver

should not operate the controls
while the vehicle is in motion.

43
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

Adjusting the brightness and Adjusting the date and the Choosing the units
contrast time
) Press on A.
) Press on A. ) Press on A. ) Use C to select the "Choice of
II ) Use C to select the "Brightness - ) Use C to select the "Date and units" menu, then confirm your
video adjustment" menu. Confirm time adjustment" menu, then choice with a press on C on the
with a press on C on the steering confirm your choice with a press steering wheel or D on the audio
wheel or D on the audio equip- on C on the steering wheel or D equipment.
ment. on the audio equipment. ) Using C, select the unit then val-
) Select the configuration of the ) Select the screen configuration idate with a press on C on the
screen using C. Confirm with a using C. Confirm with a press steering wheel or D on the audio
press on C on the steering wheel on C on the steering wheel or D equipment.
or D on the audio equipment. on the audio equipment. ) Confirm with "OK" on the screen.
) Select the brightness setting. ) Select the date and the time set-
Confirm with a press on C on the tings, using B. Confirm with a
steering wheel or D on the audio press on C on the steering wheel
equipment. or D on the audio equipment.
) Select the inverse or normal dis- ) Press C to select the values you
play mode using C then validate wish to modify. Confirm your Selection of the type of
with a press on C on the steering choice with a press on C on the information displayed (Mode)
wheel or D on the audio equip- steering wheel or D on the audio
ment. To adjust the brightness equipment. Successive presses on the end of
select "+" or "-" and save your ) Confirm with "OK" on the screen. the wiper stalk or on the MODE but-
setting with a press on C. ton on the audio equipment permit
) Confirm with "OK" on the screen. selection of the type of informa-
tion presented on the multifunction
screen (date or radio, CD, MP3 CD,
CD changer).

44
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

16/9 COLOUR SCREEN Controls "SETUP" menu

(WITH MYWAY )

II

Displays on the screen From the MyWay control panel, to ) Press the "SETUP" button to
select one of the applications: gain access to the "SETUP"
It displays the following information ) press the dedicated "RADIO", menu. This allows you to select
automatically and directly: "MUSIC", "NAV", "TRAFFIC", from the following functions:
- time, "SETUP" or "PHONE" button - "System language",
- date, for access to the corresponding - "Date & time",
menu,
- altitude, - "Display",
) turn the dial to move the selection,
- ambient temperature (the value - "Units",
displayed flashes if there is a risk ) press the dial to confirm the se-
of ice), lection, - "System".
- audio functions, or
- satellite navigation system infor- ) press the "ESC" button to aban-
mation. don the current operation and re-
turn to the previous display. System language
This menu allows you to select the lan-
guage used by the display: Deutsch,
English, Espanol, Français, Italiano,
For more information on these Nederlands, Polski, Portugues,
applications, refer to the "Audio Türkçe*.
Equipment" section or to the spe-
cific user guide given to you with
the other owner's documents.
* According to country.
45
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

Date & time ) Press the dial to confirm. Units

This menu allows you to set the date ) Turn the dial or use the alphanu- This menu allows you to select the
and time, the format of the date and meric keypad to select the digits units for temperature (°C or °F) and
the format of the time. which form the date and time. distance (miles or kilometres).
II To set the date and time: ) Press the dial to confirm each
) Press the "SETUP" control. field.
) Turn the dial to select "DATE & ) Turn the dial to select "DATE
TIME". FORMAT".
) Choose the format required and System
) Press the dial to confirm.
press the dial to confirm. This menu allows you to restore the
) Turn the dial to select "SET factory configuration, display the soft-
DATE & TIME". ) Turn the dial to select "TIME
FORMAT". ware version and activate scrolling
) Press the dial to confirm. text.
) Choose the format required and
) Turn the dial to select a field: press the dial to confirm.
- C for the day,
- D for the month,
- E for the year,
- F for the time.
For safety reasons, configuration
of the multifunction screen by the
driver must be only done when
stationary.

Display
This menu allows you to set the
brightness of the screen, the screen
colour scheme and the colour of the
map (day/night or auto mode).

46
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

16/9 HIGH DEFINITION

COLOUR SCREEN
(WITH NAVIDRIVE 3D) For more information on these
Controls applications, refer to the "Audio
Equipment" section or to the spe- II
cific user guide given to you with
the other owner's documents.

Displays on the screen From the NaviDrive 3D control panel,

to select one of the applications:
It displays the following information ) press the dedicated "RADIO",
automatically and directly: "MEDIA", "NAV", "TRAFFIC",
- time, "ADDR BOOK" or "SETUP"
- date, button for access to the corre-
sponding menu,
- altitude,
) turn the dial to move the selection,
- ambient temperature (the value
displayed flashes if there is a risk ) press the dial to confirm the selection,
of ice), or
- audio functions, ) press the "ESC" button to aban-
- telephone and address book in- don the current operation and re-
formation, turn to the previous display.
- satellite navigation system infor-
mation.

47
 M U LT I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S

"SETUP" menu Date & Time

This menu allows you to set the date For safety reasons, configuration
and time, the format of the date and of the multifunction screen by the
the format of the time (refer to the driver must only be done when
II "Audio Equipment" section or to the stationary.
specific user guide given to you with
the other owner's documents).

Display
This menu allows you to set the
brightness of the screen, the screen
) Press the "SETUP" button to gain colour scheme and the colour of the
access to the "SETUP" menu. map (day/night or auto mode).
This allows you to select from
the following functions:
- "Languages and Speech",
- "Date & Time", Units
- "Display", This menu allows you to select the
- "Units", units: temperature (°C or °F) and
distance (km or miles).
- "System".

Language & Speech System

This menu allows you to: This menu allows you to restore the
- select the language used by factory configuration, display the
the display (Deutsch, English, software version and activate scroll-
Espanol, Français, Italiano, ing text.
Nederlands, Polski, Portugues,
Türkçe*),
- select the voice recognition pa-
rameters (activation/deactivation,
advice on use, personal voice
programming, etc.),
- set the volume of the voice syn-
thesiser.
* According to country.
48
COMFORT

VENTILATION
A. Sunshine sensor.
B. Soft air diffusion grille.
The soft air diffusion grille located
in the centre of the dashboard
provides optimum distribution of
the air for the front seats.
III
This system eliminates unpleas-
ant air currents while maintaining
an optimum temperature in the
passenger compartment.
To open the soft air diffusion
grille, turn the wheel upwards.
To close the soft air diffusion grille,
turn the wheel fully downwards.
In very hot weather, to obtain
more satisfactory central and
side ventilation, it is advisable to
close the diffused air grille.
C. Cooled glove box.
D. Rear passenger vents.

49
 COMFORT

HEATING, VENTILATION In order to be effective, the air Air circulation

AND AIR CONDITIONING conditioning must be used with the
RECOMMENDATIONS windows closed. If the vehicle has Maximum comfort is obtained by
been parked in the sun for a long means of a good distribution of air in
period and the interior tempera- the passenger compartment, both in
ture is very high, first ventilate the the front and in the rear.
Air conditioning passenger compartment with the To obtain a uniform distribution of
III windows open for a few minutes, air, take care not to block the ex-
We recommend use of the automatic then close the windows.
regulation of the air conditioning. terior air intake grille located at the
To keep the air conditioning system base of the windscreen, the vents,
It permits automatic and optimised in good working order it is essential the air outlets under the front seats
control of all of the following functions: that it is operated at least once a and the air extractor located behind
air flow, temperature in the passenger month. the flaps in the boot.
compartment and air distribution, by
means of various sensors (ambient The air conditioning uses engine The front and rear vents are fitted
temperature, sunshine). This elimi- power during its operation. As a with thumbwheels to adjust the air
nates any need for you to change result, the fuel consumption of the flow and direction. We recommend
your settings other than the tempera- vehicle increases. that you leave all of the vents open.
ture value displayed. In certain cases of particularly ardu-
) Take care not to cover the sun- ous use (e.g. towing the maximum
shine sensor A. load on a steep gradient in high
temperatures), switching off the air Dust filter/Odour filter
If you select the automatic mode conditioning saves engine power
(by pressing the "AUTO" control) (active carbon)
and improves the towing capacity.
and leave all of the vents open, opti-
mum comfort will be maintained and There is a filter for excluding odours
humidity and condensation will be and dust.
removed regardless of the exterior This filter must be changed in line
climatic conditions. Air inlet with the vehicle’s servicing schedule
The temperature in the passenger (see the vehicle’s servicing booklet).
compartment can only be lower than Check that the exterior grille for the
the ambient temperature if the air air inlet, at the bottom of the wind-
conditioning is on. screen, is clean and free of dead
leaves, snow, etc.
When washing the vehicle using a
high pressure nozzle, avoid spraying
at the air inlet.

50
 COMFORT

DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING (MONO-ZONE) 2. Temperature adjustment

Turn control 2 to change

the temperature:
- Clockwise to increase
the temperature.
- Anticlockwise to re-
duce the temperature. III
The setting required is displayed.
The value indicated in the screen
corresponds to a level of comfort
The air conditioning system operates 1. Automatic operation and not to a temperature in degrees
with the engine running. Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on
Mono-zone: this is the overall This is the normal sys- the screen configuration.
regulation of the temperature, distri- tem operating mode. A setting around the value 21 usu-
bution and flow of air in the passenger In accordance with the ally provides optimum comfort.
compartment. level of comfort chosen, However, depending on your re-
pressing this control, quirements, a setting between 18
The symbols and messages associ- confirmed illumination
ated with the digital air conditioning and 24 is normal.
of indicator lamp A, permits automatic
controls appear in the multifunction and simultaneous control of all of the On entering the vehicle, the interior
screen. following functions: temperature may be much colder (or
1. Automatic operation warmer) than is comfortable. There
- Air flow. is no need to change the tempera-
2. Temperature adjustment - Temperature in the passenger ture displayed to obtain rapidly the
3. Air distribution adjustment compartment. level of comfort required.
4. Activation/deactivation of the air - Air distribution. The automatic regulation of the air
conditioning - Air intake. conditioning will use its maximum
5. Air flow adjustment performance settings to correct the
- Air conditioning. temperature difference as quickly as
6. Front demisting - defrosting
possible.
7. Rear demisting - defrosting
It is advisable to leave all of the
8. Air recirculation - intake of exterior vents open.
air
Simply pressing one of the controls,
9. Screen with the exception of control 2, switches
the system to manual mode.
Indicator lamp A goes off.

51
 COMFORT

Control via the manual controls 4. Air conditioning Switching off the ventilation
It is possible to adjust one or more The air conditioning will only oper-
functions manually, while leaving the ate when the engine is running. The ) Turn control 5 to the
other functions in automatic mode. air blower control (air flow adjust- left until the flow of
) Press one of the controls, with ment) must be active to obtain air air stops.
the exception of that which regu- conditioning.
lates the temperature 2. Indicator
III lamp A goes off. ) Press control 4. The "OFF" symbol is displayed in
Switching to manual mode may result Indicator lamp B the multifunction screen.
in discomfort (temperature, humidity, comes on. This action switches off the screen
odour, condensation) and may not and the indicator lamps.
provide optimum comfort.
It deactivates all of the system's
To return to automatic mode, press In order to be effective, the air functions, with the exception of the
the "AUTO" control. conditioning must be used with the rear screen demisting.
windows closed. The temperature-related comfort is
Deactivating the air conditioning may no longer controlled (temperature,
result in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour, condensation).
humidity, odour, condensation). Avoid driving for too long with the air
3. Air distribution adjustment
conditioning off.
) Press the controls 3 5. Air flow adjustment
to change the distri-
bution of the air flow. ) Turn control 5 to the To reactivate the air conditioning:
right to increase the
air flow or to the left ) Press control 1.
to reduce it.
6. Front demisting - defrosting
The indicator lamps corresponding
to the distribution chosen come on:
The air flow level is indicated by the In certain cases, the
- Windscreen and front side win- progressive illumination of the bars "AUTO" mode may not
dows. in the control panel screen 9. be sufficient to demist or
- Front ventilation (central and To prevent condensation and dete- defrost the windows (hu-
side vents and air diffusion grille rioration of the quality of the air in midity, several passen-
if open) and rear ventilation. the passenger compartment, ensure gers, ice).
- Front and rear footwells. that an adequate flow of air is main- ) Press control 6 to clear the win-
Simultaneous display of the distri- tained. dows quickly. The indicator lamp
bution of air to the windscreen and comes on.
side windows and of front and rear
ventilation is not possible.
52
 COMFORT

It controls the temperature, air flow However, demisting resumes when

and intake and distributes the ven- the engine is switched on again. - When starting with the engine
tilation to the windscreen and front cold, the flow will reach its op-
Switch off the rear screen and door timum level gradually to pre-
side windows. mirrors demisting when you consider vent an excessive distribution
Resuming manual control exits from this necessary as low current con- of cold air.
"Demisting" mode. It must be can- sumption reduces fuel consumption.
celled to permit renewal of the air - When entering the vehicle af-
in the passenger compartment and ter it has been parked for a III
demisting. fairly long period, if the inte-
rior temperature is very differ-
Once the screen is clear, pressing ent from your comfort setting
control 1 returns the system to "AUTO" there is no need to change
mode. the temperature displayed
in order to quickly reach the
level of comfort required. The
7. Rear demisting - defrosting 8. Intake of exterior air/ system automatically uses its
The heated rear screen operates Recirculation of interior air maximum performance to cor-
independently of the air conditioning This function enables you to isolate rect the difference in tempera-
system. the passenger compartment from ture as quickly as possible.
exterior fumes and odours. - The water resulting from the
air conditioning condensation
) Press control 7, with ) Press control 8 several is discharged via an open-
the engine running, times to set the air in- ing provided for this purpose;
to demist the rear take mode, the indica- therefore, a puddle of water
screen and the door tor lamp comes on. may form underneath the ve-
mirrors. The indicator hicle when stationary.
lamp comes on. It must be cancelled as soon as - In all seasons, if the weather
Demisting is switched off automatically possible to permit renewal of the is cool, the air conditioning
to prevent an excessive consumption air in the passenger compartment is useful as it removes the
of current and in relation to the ambient and demisting. humidity from the air and the
temperature. condensation. Avoid driving
It may be stopped by pressing for prolonged periods with the
control 7 again or when the engine air conditioning switched off.
is switched off.

With Stop & Start, when demisting

has been activated, the STOP mode
is not available.
53
 COMFORT

DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING (DUAL-ZONE) 1a-1b. Automatic operation

This is the normal sys-

tem operating mode.
In accordance with the
level of comfort chosen,
III pressing this control,
confirmed by illumina-
tion of indicator lamp A, permits
automatic and simultaneous control
of all of the following functions:
The air conditioning system operates with the engine running. - Air flow.
Dual-zone: this is the independent regulation of the temperature and air distri- - Temperature in the passenger
bution on the driver's side and the front passenger's side. compartment.
The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature and the distri- - Air distribution.
bution of the air to suit their requirements. - Air conditioning.
The symbols and messages associated with the digital air conditioning controls - Automatic air recirculation.
appear in the multifunction screen.
It is advisable to leave all of the
1a. Automatic operation on the 4a. Driver's zone screen vents open. Simply pressing one
driver's side of the controls, with the exception
4b. Passenger's zone screen of temperature regulation 2a and
1b. Automatic operation on the 5. Air flow adjustment 2b, switches the system to manual
passenger's side mode. Indicator lamp A goes off.
6. Activation/deactivation of the air
2a. Temperature adjustment on the conditioning
driver's side
7. Air recirculation – intake of
2b. Temperature adjustment on the exterior air
passenger's side
8. Rear demisting – defrosting
3a. Air distribution adjustment on
the driver's side 9. Front demisting – defrosting
3b. Air distribution adjustment on
the passenger's side

54
 COMFORT

2a-2b. Temperature adjustment Control via the manual controls 3a-3b. Air distribution adjustment
) Press one of the controls, with
the exception of temperature ) Press control
regulation 2a and 2b. The indi- 3a to change
cator lamps A in the "AUTO" the distribu-
controls go off. tion of the air
It is possible to adjust one or more flow on the
functions manually while leaving the driver's side. III
other functions in automatic mode.
) Turn control 2a to change the Switching to manual mode may re- ) Press control 3b to change the
temperature on the driver's side sult in discomfort (temperature, hu- distribution of the air flow on the
and control 2b to change the midity, odour, condensation) and passenger's side.
temperature on the passenger's may not provide optimum comfort. The indicator lamps corresponding
side: to the right to increase the To return to "AUTO" mode, press to the distribution chosen come on:
temperature or to the left to re- controls 1a and 1b. The indicator - Windscreen and front side win-
duce it. lamps A come on. dows.
The setting required is displayed. - Front ventilation (central and
The value indicated on the display side vents and air diffusion grille
corresponds to a level of comfort if open) and rear ventilation.
and not to a temperature in degrees - Front and rear footwells.
Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on
the screen configuration.
A setting around the value 21 usu-
ally provides optimum comfort.
However, depending on your re- Simultaneous display of the distribu-
quirements, a setting between 18 tion of air to the windscreen and side
and 24 is normal. windows and of front and rear venti-
On entering the vehicle, the interior lation is not possible.
temperature may be much colder (or
warmer) than is comfortable. There
is no need to change the tempera-
ture displayed in order to quickly
obtain the level of comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air
conditioning will use its maximum
performance settings to correct the
temperature difference as quickly as
possible.

55
 COMFORT

5. Air flow adjustment 7. Air recirculation - Closing the air intake

intake of exterior air
) Press the control: Automatic air intake ) Press control 7 to
- to increase the air flow, mode close the exterior air
It is activated by default intake.
- to reduce the air flow.
in automatic comfort reg-
III ulation.
While retaining the other settings,
Automatic mode is acti- this position allows the driver to iso-
The air flow level is indicated by the vated with reverse gear or late the passenger compartment at
progressive lighting of the fan blade operation of the screen- any time from unpleasant exterior
indicator lamps. wash. odours and fumes.
Reducing the flow to minimum This function permits re- It must be cancelled as soon as pos-
switches the air conditioning OFF. circulation of the air and isolation sible to permit renewal of the air in
To prevent condensation and dete- the passenger compartment from the passenger compartment and
rioration of the quality of the air in exterior fumes and odours. It is inac- demisting.
the passenger compartment, ensure tive when the ambient temperature
that an adequate flow of air is main- is below +5 °C to avoid the risk of
tained. misting inside the vehicle.
Intake of exterior air

6. Air conditioning ) Press control 7 once

to open the exterior air
intake.
The air conditioning will
only operate when the
engine is running. The air
blower control (air flow ad-
justment) must be active in
order to obtain air conditioning.
) Press control 6. The indicator
lamp comes on.
In order to be effective, the air condi-
tioning must be used with the windows
closed.

56
 COMFORT

8. Rear demisting - defrosting 9. Front demisting - defrosting

When starting with the engine
cold, air flow will reach its opti-
The heated rear screen In certain cases, the mum level gradually to prevent an
operates independently "AUTO" mode may not excessive distribution of cold air.
of the air conditioning be sufficient to demist When entering the vehicle after it
system. or defrost the windows has been parked for a fairly long
(humidity, several pas- period, if the interior temperature
) Press control 8, with the en- sengers, ice). is very different from your comfort
III
gine running, to demist the rear setting there is no need to change
screen and the mirrors. The indi- ) Press control 9 to clear the win- the temperature displayed in or-
cator lamp comes on. dows quickly. The indicator lamp der to quickly reach the level of
Demisting is switched off automati- comes on. comfort required. The system
cally to avoid excessive consump- This system controls the temperature, automatically uses its maximum
tion of current and depending on the air flow and intake and distributes performance to correct the differ-
exterior temperature. the ventilation to the windscreen ence in temperature as quickly as
It may be stopped by pressing con- and front side windows. possible.
trol 8 again or when the engine is Resuming manual control exits from The water resulting from the air
switched off. the "Demisting" mode. It must be conditioning condensation is dis-
In this latter case, the demisting re- cancelled as soon as possible to charged via an opening provided
sumes if the engine is switched on permit renewal of the air in the pas- for this purpose; therefore, a pud-
again within one minute. senger compartment and demisting. dle of water may form underneath
the vehicle when stationary.
Pressing one of the controls 1a and
1b returns the system to the "AUTO" In all seasons, if the weather is
mode. cool, the air conditioning is use-
ful as it removes the humidity
Switch off the rear screen and exterior from the air and the condensa-
mirrors demisting when you consider tion. Avoid driving for prolonged
this necessary as low current con- periods with the air conditioning
sumption reduces fuel consumption. switched off.
With Stop & Start, when demisting
has been activated, the STOP mode
is not available.

57
 COMFORT

PROGRAMMABLE HEATING Programming remote control Displaying the functions

The heating system programming
remote control consists of the fol-
lowing buttons and displays:
1. Scrolling functions menu buttons.
2. Function indicator lights: clock,
III temperature, operating time, pro-
grammed time, heater operation,
heating management symbols.
3. Digital displays: time, tempera-
ture, duration of operation, pro-
grammed time or level of heating.
4. Off button.
5. On button.
Press the buttons 1 in succession to
display the functions.
The first press of the left-hand or
right-hand button displays the time.
The programmable heating operates Displays on the remote Next, the left-hand button permits ac-
independently of the engine. control screen cess to the programming time then to
the level of heating (C1 to C5).
When the engine is off, it pre-heats
the coolant circuit in order to benefit The right-hand button permits ac-
from an optimum engine operating cess to the passenger compartment
temperature from the time the en- temperature then to the duration of
gine is switched on. operation of the heater if it is to be
switched on immediately.
The programmable heating system
is switched on using the long range
remote control. Activation can be im-
mediate or deferred by means of a
programming function.

The passenger compartment

If a malfunction of the program- temperature information is only
mable heating system occurs, available when the engine is off.
contact a CITROËN dealer.

58
 COMFORT

Setting the time Immediate activation Setting the duration

of operation

III

Once the time has been displayed, Press button 5 (ON) until the mes- Press the buttons 1 to display the
by means of the buttons 1, press sage "OK" appears. duration of operation.
buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously with- When the signal has been received,
in 10 seconds. This symbol is displayed.
the message "OK" is displayed
along with the duration of operation.
This symbol flashes.
Once the duration of operation has
The heater starts and this been displayed, press buttons 4 and
symbol is displayed. 5 simultaneously within 10 seconds.
Set the time using the buttons 1.
Press buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously To deactivate the function, press This symbol flashes.
to save it. button 4 (OFF) until the message
"OK" appears.
This symbol is displayed (fixed). Set the duration by pressing the
buttons 1 (adjustment in steps of
This symbol is switched off. 10 mins and max value 30 mins).
Press buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously
to save the duration of operation.
When carrying out these opera- This symbol is displayed (fixed).
tions, if the message "FAIL" ap-
pears, the signal has not been
received. Repeat the procedure
after changing your location.
The factory setting value is 30 minutes.
59
 COMFORT

Programming the heating Activation - deactivation Switching off the heating

Once the programming time has Press button 5 (ON).
You must programme your depar- been displayed by means of the but-
ture time in order for the system to tons 1, press button 5 (ON) until the
calculate the optimum heater start The symbol "HTM" remains on.
message "OK" appears.
time automatically.

III When the signal has been received,

the message "OK" is displayed along Changing the level of heating
with the symbol "HTM". The system offers 5 levels of heat-
ing (from the lowest level C1 to the
This symbol is displayed when highest level C5).
the heater starts.
Once the level of heating has been
displayed by means of the buttons 1,
press buttons 4 and 5 simultaneously.
HTM: Heat Thermo Management. The letter "C" flashes.
Set the level of heating by pressing
the buttons 1.
Programming the departure time
To deactivate the programming, Press buttons 4 and 5 simultane-
Press the buttons 1 to display the press button 4 (OFF) until the mes- ously to save the level selected. The
programming time. sage "OK" appears. letter "C" is displayed (fixed).

This symbol is displayed. The symbol "HTM" is switched off.

Once the programming time has

been displayed, press buttons 4 and
5 simultaneously within 10 seconds.
When carrying out these opera-
This symbol flashes. tions, if the message "FAIL" ap- The factory pre-sets are replaced
pears, the signal has not been by the new settings entered. The
received. Repeat the procedure programmed times are stored until
after changing your location. the next time they are changed.
Set the time by pressing the buttons 1
and press buttons 4 and 5 simultane- When the departure time is acti-
ously to save it. vated, the level of heating cannot
be changed. The departure time
This symbol is displayed (fixed). must be deactivated first.

60
 COMFORT

Changing the battery

The remote control is supplied by a
6 V-28L battery, which is supplied.
!
Information on the display indicates
when it is time to replace this battery.
Unclip the casing then replace the Always switch off the program-
battery. mable heating while filling with
fuel to avoid any risk of fire or III
The remote control must then be explosion.
reinitialised, see below.
To avoid any risk of poisoning and
asphyxiation, the programmable
Do not discard the used heating must not be used, even
batteries, take them to an for short periods, in an enclosed
approved collection point. space such as a garage or work-
shop which is not equipped with an
exhaust gas extraction system.
Do not park the vehicle on an
Reinitialising the remote control inflammable surface (dry grass,
If the vehicle's battery is disconnected dead leaves, paper…), there is a
or the remote control's battery is re- risk of fire.
placed, the remote control must be The programmable heating system
reinitialised. is supplied by the vehicle's fuel tank.
After switching on the power, press Before use, ensure that the quantity
button 4 (OFF) for 1 second within of fuel remaining is sufficient. If the
the next 5 seconds. If the operation fuel tank is at the reserve, we strong-
has taken place correctly the mes- ly advise that you do not programme
sage "OK" is displayed on the remote the heating.
control screen.
If a problem occurs, the message The interior volumetric protection
"FAIL" appears. Repeat the operation. alarm movement sensor may be
disturbed by the flow of air from
the programmable heating when
it is in operation.
To avoid any unexpected trigger-
In addition, your programmable ing of the alarm during use of the
heating can be used to pre-heat programmable heating, it is ad-
your vehicle's passenger com- visable to deactivate the interior
partment. volumetric protection.
61
 COMFORT

FRONT SEATS MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, seat back and head restraint which can all be 1. Adjustments to the height and
adjusted for optimum driving comfort. angle of the head restraint
To raise it, pull upwards.
To lower it, press on the control A
to unlock it, and simultaneously
III on the head restraint itself. The
adjustment is correct when the
top edge of the head restraint is
at the same height as the top of
the head. It is also tilt adjustable.
To raise it, press control A to
unlock it, then pull it upwards.
It may be necessary to adjust the
backrest angle.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle
Operate the control and adjust
the position of the backrest to
the front or to the rear.
3. Adjustment of the seat height
Raise or lower the control the
number of times required to
obtain the desired position.
4. Longitudinal adjustment of seat
Lift the control bar and adjust to
the desired position.
5. Adjustment of lumbar support
Turn the control and adjust to the
desired position.
6. Heated seat controls
The heated seats only operate
when the engine is running.
For your safety, do not drive with
the head restraints removed; they
must be in place and correctly
adjusted.
62
 COMFORT

FRONT SEATS 4. Adjustment of lumbar support

This function allows you to inde-
pendently adjust the height and
level of lumbar support.
Move the control:
) Forwards or backwards to increase
or reduce the lumbar support. III
) Upwards or downwards to raise or
lower the lumbar support zone.

Head restraint height and

angle adjustments on electric
seats

ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENTS
To adjust the electric seats, switch on the ignition or start the engine if the
vehicle has gone into economy mode.
Seat adjustments are also possible for a short period after opening one of the
front doors or switching off the ignition. ) To adjust the angle of the head
1. Adjustment of the seat height 2. Adjustment of the backrest angle restraint, push back or pull for-
and angle, and longitudinal Move the control forwards or ward section C of the head re-
adjustment backwards to adjust the backrest straint until you reach the desired
) Raise or lower the front of the angle. position.
control to adjust the seat cushion 3. Adjustment of the angle of the ) To raise it, pull upwards.
angle. top of the backrest ) To lower it, press on the control D
) Raise or lower the rear of the Move the control forwards or to unlock it, and simultaneously
control to raise or lower the seat. backwards to adjust the angle of on the head restraint itself.
) Simultaneously raise or lower the top of the backrest. ) To remove it, press on the
the front and rear of the control control D to unlock it, then pull it
in order to raise or lower the upwards.
entire seat.
63
 COMFORT

Heated seats control Massage function Welcome function

The welcome function assists entry
With the engine running, the front and leaving the vehicle.
seats can operate separately. After switching off the ignition and
) Use the corresponding adjust- opening the driver’s door, the seat
ment dial, placed on the outer moves back automatically and then
III side of each front seat, to switch stays in this position, ready for the
on and select the level of heating next entry to the vehicle.
required: When switching on the ignition, the
seat moves forward to the memo-
rised driving position.
0: Off. When moving the seat, take care
1: Low. that no person or object hinders the
2: Medium. automatic movement of the seat.
This function provides the driver with This function is deactivated by de-
3: High. a back massage. It only operates fault. You may activate or deactivate
when the engine is running. this function using the "Main Menu"
) Press on button A. on the instrument panel screen. To
The warning lamp comes on and the do so, select "Vehicle parameters/
massage function is activated for a Comfort/Driver welcome".
period of 1 hour. During this time,
massage is performed in cycles of
6 minutes (4 minutes of massage fol-
lowed by 2 minutes break). In total,
the system will perform 10 cycles.
After 1 hour, the function is deacti-
vated. The warning lamp goes out.

Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage
function at any time by pressing on
button A.

64
 COMFORT

Storing driving positions Storing a position REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

Using buttons M/1/2
) Switch on the ignition.
) Adjust your seat.
) Press button M, then press but-
ton 1 or 2 within four seconds.
An audible signal confirms that the
III
settings have been stored.
Storing a new position cancels the
previous position.

System which stores the settings of The rear head restraints can be
the driver's seat and air conditioning. removed and have two positions:
Up to two positions can be stored - high, position for use,
using the buttons on the side of the For your safety, avoid storing a
driving position while driving. - low, storage position.
driver's seat. To raise a head restraint, pull it up-
wards.
To lower it, press the lug then the
head restraint.
Recalling a stored position To remove it, place it in the high posi-
tion, push the lug and pull it upwards.
Ignition on or engine running To refit it, engage the head restraint
) Briefly press button 1 or 2 to re- rods in the holes taking care to re-
call the corresponding position. main in line with the seat back.
An audible signal indicates the end
of the adjustment.
When the ignition is on, after a few
consecutive position recalls, the
function will be deactivated until the Never drive with the head restraints
engine is started, to prevent dis- removed, they must be in place and
charging of the battery. correctly adjusted.

65
 COMFORT

REAR SEATS Refitting the seat cushion Returning the seat back to its
original position
) Position the seat cushion 1 verti-
cally in its fixings. When returning the rear seat to its
original position:
) Fold down the seat cushion 1.
) put the seat back 2 in the upright
) Press on the seat cushion to position and secure it,
secure it.
III ) fold the seat cushion 1,
) refit the head restraints or put
them back in place.
When returning the rear seat to its
Folding the seat original position, take care not to trap
the seat belts and ensure that their
In order to fold a rear seat without buckles are positioned correctly.
any risk of damage, always start
with the seat cushion, never with
the seat back:
Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) or ) move the corresponding front
right-hand (1/3) section of which seat forwards if necessary,
can be folded to adapt the boot load ) raise the front of the seat cushion 1,
space. ) tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against
the front seat,
) check that the seat belt is posi-
Removing the seat cushion tioned correctly on the side of
) Move the corresponding front the seat back,
seat forwards if necessary. ) lower or remove the head re-
) Raise the front of the seat cushion 1. straints if necessary,
) Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully ) pull the control 3 forwards to re-
against the front seat. lease the seat back 2,
) Remove the seat cushion 1 from ) tilt the seat back 2.
its fixings by pulling upwards. The seat cushion 1 can be removed The red indicator on the control 3
to increase the loading volume. should no longer be visible; if it is,
push the seat fully back.

66
 COMFORT

MIRRORS Rear view mirror

The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear. Adjustable mirror providing a central
Take this into account in order to rearward view.
correctly judge the distance of ve- Equipped with an anti-dazzle sys-
hicles approaching from behind. tem, which darkens the mirror glass:
this reduces the nuisance to the
Demisting/defrosting of the door driver caused by the headlamps III
mirrors is associated with that of from following vehicles, low sun...
the rear screen.
As a safety measure, the mirrors
should be adjusted to reduce the
Folding "blind spot".
) from outside; lock the vehicle
using the remote control or the Manual day/night model
Door mirrors key.
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror ) from inside; with the ignition on,
glasses providing the lateral rear- pull control A rearwards.
ward vision necessary for overtaking If the mirrors are folded using con-
or parking. They can also be folded. trol A, they will not unfold when the
vehicle is unlocked. Control A must
be pulled again.

Unfolding
Adjustment ) from outside; unlock the vehicle
With the ignition on: using the remote control or the
key.
) move control A to the right or to
the left to select the corresponding ) from inside; with the ignition on,
mirror, pull control A rearwards.
Adjustment
) move control B in all four direc- If the position is changed manually,
tions to adjust, a long press on control A re-engages ) Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
the mirror. directed correctly in the "day" position.
) return control A to the central position.
The folding and unfolding of the door Day/night position
mirrors using the remote control can
be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer ) Pull the lever to change to the
or a qualified workshop. "night" anti-dazzle position.
) Push the lever to change to the
normal "day" position.
67
 COMFORT

Automatic day/night model STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT

The steering wheel can be adjusted
for height and reach to adapt the
driving position to the size of the
driver.

III

By means of a sensor, which mea- In vehicles fitted with electrochro-

sures the light from the rear of the matic door mirrors, the system has
vehicle, this system automatically an on/off button and an associated
and progressively changes between warning lamp.
the day and night uses.
It has an anti-dazzle system which
darkens the mirror glass: this reduces Adjustment
any driver discomfort caused by the On
light beam of following vehicles, the ) First, adjust the driver's seat to
) With the ignition on, press on the most suitable position.
sun... button 1.
) When stationary, pull the lever A
The warning lamp 2 comes on and the to unlock the steering wheel ad-
mirror glass is in automatic mode. justment.
) Adjust for height and reach.
In order to guarantee optimum visi-
bility during your manoeuvres, the Off ) Push the lever to lock the steering
mirror lightens automatically when wheel adjustment.
) Press on button 1.
reverse gear is engaged. After locking, if you press firmly on
The warning lamp 2 goes off and the the steering wheel, a slight click may
mirror glass remains in its lightest be heard.
definition.
As a safety precaution, these op-
erations must only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
68
 ACCESS

REMOTE CONTROL KEY Complete unlocking using the Each unlocking is confirmed by
remote control rapid flashing of the direction indica-
System which permits central unlock- tors for approximately two seconds
ing or locking of the vehicle using the ) Press the open padlock and by switching on of the courtesy
lock or from a distance. It is also used to unlock the vehicle. lamp.
to locate and start the vehicle and
provide guide-me-home lighting, as
well as providing protection against According to version, the exterior
theft. mirrors unfold at the same time as
Complete unlocking using the key the first unlocking action.
) Turn the key to the left in the IV
Unlocking the vehicle driver's door lock to unlock the
vehicle.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid The complete or selective unlocking
flashing of the direction indicators parameter is set via the instrument
for approximately two seconds and panel screen configuration menu (see
lighting of the courtesy lamp (if the "Instruments and controls" section).
function is activated).
According to version, the door mirrors
unfold at the same time.
Complete unlocking is activated by
default.

Selective unlocking using

the remote control
Selective unlocking is not possible
) Press the open pad- using the key.
lock once to unlock the
driver's door only.

Unfolding the key ) Press the open padlock again to Electric boot opening
unlock the other doors and the
) First press button A to unfold the boot. ) Press button B to open
key. the boot.

69
 ACCESS

Locking the vehicle Deadlocking using the key

If one of the doors, the rear screen ) Turn the key to the right in the
Normal locking using the remote or the boot is still open, the central driver's door lock to lock the
control locking does not take place. vehicle completely and hold it
) Press the closed pad- When the vehicle is locked, if it is in this position for more than
lock to lock the vehicle unlocked inadvertently, it will lock two seconds to close the win-
completely. again automatically after thirty sec- dows automatically in addition
onds unless a door is opened. to locking.
When stationary with the engine ) Turn the key to the right again
IV ) Press the closed padlock for off, locking is confirmed by flashing within five seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
more than two seconds to close of the interior locking control indi-
the windows and sunroof auto- cator lamp. Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed
matically in addition to locking. The folding and unfolding of the lighting of the direction indicators for
door mirrors using the remote approximately two seconds.
control can be deactivated by a According to version, the exterior
CITROËN dealer or a qualified mirrors fold at the same time.
Normal locking using the key workshop.
) Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the ve-
hicle completely.
Locking is confirmed by fixed lighting of
the direction indicators for approximate-
ly two seconds and by the courtesy Deadlocking using the
lamp going off. remote control Deadlocking renders the exterior
According to version, the door mirrors and interior door controls inoperative.
fold at the same time. ) Press the closed pad- It also deactivates the manual cen-
lock to lock the vehicle tral control button.
completely or press the
closed padlock for more When stationary with the engine
than two seconds to off, locking is confirmed by flashing
close the windows and of the indicator lamp on the interior
sunroof automatically in locking control.
addition to locking. If one of the doors or the boot is open
) Press the closed padlock again or has not been closed correctly, the
within five seconds to deadlock central locking will not work.
the vehicle. Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

70
 ACCESS

Folding the key Guide-me-home lighting Anti-theft protection

A press on button B oper- Electronic engine immobiliser
ates the guide-me-home The key contains an electronic chip
lighting (lighting of the side- which has a special code. When the
lamps, dipped beams and ignition is switched on, this code
number plate lamps). must be recognised in order for
A second press before the end of starting to be possible.
the timing cancels the guide-me- This electronic engine immobiliser
home lighting. locks the engine management sys-
The timed duration can be set via the tem a few minutes after the ignition IV
"Lighting" menu on the "Main Menu" is switched off and prevents starting
of the instrument panel screen. of the engine by anyone who does
not have the key.
) First press button A to fold the
key. In the event of a fault,
you are informed by
illumination of this
warning lamp, an au-
Locating your vehicle dible signal and a message in the
screen.
) Press the closed padlock to lo- In this case, your vehicle does not
cate your locked vehicle in a car start; contact a CITROËN dealer as
park. soon as possible.
This is indicated by switching on
of the interior lighting and flash-
ing of the direction indicators for a
few seconds.
The vehicle remains locked.

71
 ACCESS

IGNITION SWITCH Steering lock STOPPING

1. "S": After removing the key, turn
the steering wheel to lock the stee- Vehicles equipped with
ring. The key can only be removed a turbocharger
in position S.
Never stop the engine without hav-
2. "M": Ignition switched on, the ing allowed it to run for a few sec-
steering is unlocked (by turning the onds at idle, this being the time
key to position M, move the steering required for the turbocharger to re-
wheel gently if necessary). turn to a normal speed.
IV 3. "D": Starter position.
Never turn the key to this position
when the engine is running.
Do not flick the accelerator at
the moment of switching off the
ignition. This could cause serious
damage to the turbocharger(s).

1. "S": Steering lock

To unlock the steering, gently move
the steering wheel while turning the
key, without forcing it.
2. "M": Drive position Do not run the engine in an en-
closed space or where there is in-
Depending on the version of your sufficient ventilation.
vehicle, the orange and red warn-
ing lamps should also come on for It is essential always to drive with
a short time. the engine running in order to retain
braking and steering assistance.
3. "D": Starter Never remove the ignition key
before the vehicle has come to a
Release the key as soon the engine complete stop.
has started. Avoid attaching a heavy object to
If the first attempt fails, switch off the the key which would weigh down
ignition. Wait ten seconds then ope- on its shaft in the switch and could
rate the starter again. cause a malfunction.
72
 ACCESS

Operating fault Changing the battery

Following disconnection of the ve-
hicle battery, replacement of the re-
mote control battery or in the event
of a remote control fault, you can no
longer unlock, lock or locate your
vehicle.
) First of all, use the key in the lock
to unlock or lock your vehicle.
) Then, reinitialise the remote con- IV
trol.
If the problem persists, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified work-
shop as soon as possible.
Battery ref.: CR0523/3 volts.
This replacement battery is avail-
Reinitialisation able from CITROËN dealers or a
) Switch off the ignition. qualified workshop.
) Turn the key to position 2 (Drive).
If the battery is flat,
) Press the closed padlock imme- you are informed by
diately for a few seconds, until illumination of this
the operation requested is trig- warning lamp, an au-
gered. dible signal and a message in the
) Switch off the ignition and re- multifunction screen.
move the key from the ignition
switch. ) Unclip the casing using a coin at
The remote control is fully opera- the notch.
tional again. ) Slide the flat battery out of its
location.
) Slide the new battery into its
location observing the original
direction.
) Clip the casing.
) Reinitialise the remote control.

73
 ACCESS

Lost keys Anti-theft protection Do not throw the remote con-

trol batteries away, they contain
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehi- Do not make any modifications to the metals which are harmful to the
cle's V5 registration document and your electronic engine immobiliser sys- environment.
personal identification documents. tem; this could cause malfunctions. Take them to an approved collection
The CITROËN dealer will be able to point.
retrieve the key code and the transpon-
der code required to order a replace-
ment key.
IV Remote control When purchasing
a second-hand vehicle
The high frequency remote control is
a sensitive system; do not operate it Have the key codes memorised by a
while it is in your pocket as there is a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the
possibility that it may unlock the ve- keys in your possession are the only
hicle, without you being aware of it. ones which can start the vehicle.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons
of your remote control out of range
and out of sight of your vehicle. You
run the risk of stopping it from work-
ing and the remote control would
have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate
when the key is in the ignition, even
when the ignition is switched off,
except for reinitialisation.

Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may
make access to the passenger com-
partment by the emergency services
more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children
on board), remove the key from the
ignition when you leave the vehicle,
even for a short time.
74
 ACCESS

ALARM* Locking the vehicle with full Deactivation

alarm system ) Press the unlocking button on
System which protects and provides the remote control.
a deterrent against theft and break-
ins. It provides the following types of The alarm system is deactivated: the
monitoring: indicator lamp in the button goes off.
- Exterior perimeter Locking the vehicle with
The system checks for opening of exterior perimeter monitoring
the vehicle. only
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries
to open a door, the boot, the bonnet... Deactivate the interior volumetric IV
and anti-tilt monitoring to avoid un-
wanted triggering of the alarm in
- Interior volumetric certain cases such as:
The system checks for any variation - leaving a pet in the vehicle,
in the volume in the passenger com- - leaving a window partially open,
partment. Activation - washing your vehicle,
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks - changing a wheel,
a window, enters the passenger com- ) Switch off the ignition and get out
partment or moves inside the vehicle. of the vehicle. - having your vehicle towed,
) Press the locking button on the - transport by sea.
- Tilt remote control.
The system checks for any change The monitoring system is active: the
in the attitude of the vehicle. indicator lamp in the button flashes Deactivation of the interior
once per second. volumetric and anti-tilt
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle monitoring
is lifted, moved or knocked. After the locking button on the re-
mote control is pressed, the exterior ) Switch off the ignition.
Self-protection function perimeter monitoring is activated ) Within ten seconds, press the
! The system checks for the after a delay of 5 seconds and the button until the indicator lamp is
putting out of service of its interior volumetric and anti-tilt moni- on continuously.
components. toring after a delay of 45 seconds. ) Get out of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if the bat- If an opening (door, boot...) is not ) Press the locking button on the
tery, the central control or the si- closed fully, the vehicle is not locked remote control immediately.
ren wiring are put out of service or but the exterior perimeter monitor-
ing will be activated after a delay of The exterior perimeter monitoring
damaged. alone is activated: the indicator lamp in
45 seconds at the same time as the
For all work on the alarm system, interior volumetric and anti-tilt moni- the button flashes once per second.
contact a CITROËN dealer or a toring. To be effective, this deactivation
qualified workshop. must be carried out each time the
* According to country. ignition is switched off.
75
 ACCESS

Triggering of the alarm Locking the vehicle without

activating the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the
siren and flashing of the direction in- ) Lock or deadlock the vehicle us-
dicators for thirty seconds. ing the key in the driver's door
The monitoring functions remain lock.
active until the alarm has been trig-
gered eleven times in succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using Operating fault
the remote control, rapid flashing of
IV the indicator lamp in the button in- When the ignition is switched on,
forms you that the alarm was trig- fixed illumination of the indicator
gered during your absence. When lamp in the button indicates a fault
the ignition is switched on, this flash- with the system.
Reactivation of the interior ing stops immediately. Have it checked by a CITROËN
volumetric and anti-tilt dealer or a qualified workshop.
monitoring
) Press the unlocking button on the
remote control to deactivate the Failure of the remote control Automatic activation*
exterior perimeter monitoring. To deactivate the monitoring func- 2 minutes after the last door or the
) Press the locking button on the tions: boot is closed, the system is activat-
remote control to activate all the ed automatically.
monitoring functions. ) Unlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock. ) To avoid triggering the alarm on
The indicator lamp in the button entering the vehicle, first press
again flashes once per second. ) Open the door; the alarm is trig- the unlocking button on the re-
gered. mote control.
) Switch on the ignition; the alarm
stops. The indicator lamp in the
button goes off.

* According to country.
76
 ACCESS

ELECTRIC WINDOWS One-touch electric windows Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets
There are two options: an obstacle, it stops and partially
- manual mode lowers again.
) Press or pull the control gently.
The window stops when the
control is released.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
IV
) press and hold the control until
- automatic mode the window opens fully,
1. Driver's electric window control.
) Press or pull the control firmly. ) then pull the control immediately
2. Passenger's electric window The window opens or closes fully and hold it until the window
control. when the control is released. closes,
3. Rear right electric window ) continue to hold the control for
control. ) Pressing the control again stops
the movement of the window. approximately one second after
4. Rear left electric window control. the window has closed.
5. Deactivation of the rear electric The safety anti-pinch function
window and door controls. is not operational during these
operations.

The electric window controls re-

main operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is
switched off or until the vehicle is
locked after a door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows
cannot be operated from the driver's
door control panel, carry out the op-
eration from the control panel of the
passenger door concerned, and vice
versa.

77
 ACCESS

Reinitialisation Deactivation of the rear This control also deactivates the

If a window does not rise automati- electric window and door interior controls for the rear doors
cally, its operation must be reini- controls (refer to the section "Child safety - §
tialised: Electric child lock").
) pull the control until the window Any other status of the indicator
stops, lamp indicates a fault with the elec-
tric child lock.
) release the control and pull it
again until the window closes Have it checked by a CITROËN
fully, dealer or a qualified workshop.

IV ) continue to hold the control for

approximately one second after
the window has closed,
) press the control to lower the
window automatically to the low
position,
) when the window has reached ) For the safety of your children,
the low position, press the con- press control 5 to deactivate the
trol again for approximately one rear electric window controls re-
second. gardless of their position.
The safety anti-pinch function Indicator lamp on, the rear controls Always remove the key from the
is not operational during these are deactivated. ignition when leaving the vehicle,
operations. Indicator lamp off, the rear controls even for a short time.
are activated. If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows,
you must reverse the movement of
A message in the instrument panel the window. To do this, press the
screen informs you of the activation/ control concerned.
deactivation of the control. When the driver operates the con-
trols for the passengers' electric
windows, they must ensure that no
one is preventing correct closing of
the windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric win-
dows correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the windows.

78
 ACCESS

DOORS From inside Manual centralised control

Opening System which provides full manual

locking or unlocking of the doors
and boot from the inside.
From outside

IV

) Pull the front door control to open

the door; this unlocks the vehicle
completely.
) Pull the rear door control to open
) After unlocking the vehicle com- the door; this unlocks only the
pletely using the remote control door opened.
or the key, pull the door handle.
Locking
) Press button A to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
comes on. It flashes when the doors
are locked while stationary with the
With the selective unlocking acti- engine off.
When the selective unlocking is acti- vated:
vated, the first press of the remote - the driver's door control unlocks
control unlocking button permits the driver's door only,
unlocking of the driver's door only.
- the other door controls unlock
the other doors and the boot.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is dead- If one of the doors is open, the cen-
locked. tral locking from the inside does not
take place.

79
 ACCESS

Unlocking Locking Locking the driver's door

) Press button A again to unlock When the speed exceeds 6 mph ) Insert the key in the lock, then
the vehicle. (10 km/h), the doors and the boot turn it to the rear.
The red indicator lamp on the button lock automatically.
switches off. If one of the doors is open, the auto- Unlocking the driver's door
matic central locking does not take
place. ) Insert the key in the lock, then
turn it to the front.
If the vehicle is locked or dead- If the boot is open, the automatic
locked from the outside, the red in- central locking of the doors is active.
dicator lamp flashes and button A Locking the front and rear
IV is inactive. passenger doors
Unlocking
) In this case, use the remote
control or the key to unlock the ) Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press
vehicle. button A to unlock the doors and
the boot temporarily.

Automatic central locking Activation

System which provides full automatic ) Press button A for more than
locking or unlocking of the doors and two seconds.
the boot while driving. A confirmation message appears on
You can activate or deactivate this the instrument panel screen, accom-
function. panied by an audible signal. ) On the rear doors, check that the
child lock is not activated.
Deactivation ) Remove the black cap, located
) Press button A again for more on the edge of the door, using
than two seconds. the key.
A confirmation message appears on ) Insert the key in the socket with-
the instrument panel screen, accom- out forcing it, then without turn-
panied by an audible signal. ing it, move the latch sideways
towards the inside of the door.
) Remove the key and refit the cap.
Emergency control
To lock or unlock the doors manu-
ally in the event of a malfunction of Unlocking the front and rear
the central locking system or battery passenger doors
failure. ) Pull the interior door opening
control.
80
 ACCESS

BOOT (SALOON) Locking/unlocking Emergency boot release

Opening With the vehicle stationary, this is System for mechanical unlocking of
carried out using: the boot in the event of a battery or
central locking malfunction.
- The remote control.
- The key in a door lock.
- The interior central locking/un-
locking control.

IV
The boot automatically locks when
the vehicle is moving at a speed of
over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if auto-
matic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened
or when the central locking button is
pressed (speed lower than 6 mph
) Press upwards on lever 1 and lift (10 km/h)).
up the boot lid.

Unlocking
) Fold back the rear seats to gain
access to the lock from inside
the boot.
) Insert a small screwdriver into
hole A of the lock to unlock the
tailgate.
) Push the white part, located in-
side the lock, to the left to unlock
the boot.

81
 ACCESS

BOOT (TOURER) The boot automatically locks when

Do not attempt to help the opening the vehicle is moving at a speed of
Manual opening of the tailgate manually after press- over 6 mph (10 km/h), even if auto-
ing the control A. matic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened
or when the central locking button
is pressed (at a speed of less than
Manual closing 6 mph (10 km/h)).
) Lower the tailgate using the inte-
rior handle C. Interrupting the opening/
IV closing of the tailgate
Electric closing When the tailgate is being opened or
closed electrically, you can interrupt
) Press the push-button D to close its movement at any point by press-
the tailgate. ing push-button D, the control A or
button B.
) Press upwards on lever A and lift
up the tailgate. You can then open or close the tail-
gate electrically or manually, if nec-
Do not interrupt the closing of the essary moving it in the opposite
tailgate; if any obstacle prevents it direction to release it.
Electric opening
closing, the operation will stop and
the tailgate will automatically rise
by a few centimetres.

Memorisation of an
Locking/unlocking intermediate position
With the vehicle stationary, this is You can store an opening angle for
carried out using: the tailgate:
- The remote control. ) Manually or automatically move
- The key in a door lock. the tailgate to the required posi-
- The interior central locking/un- tion.
locking control. ) Make a long press on push-but-
ton D. The system emits a short
) Press upwards on lever A, or audible beep.
press button B of the remote
control. ) Release the push-button D.

82
 ACCESS

Cancelling the memorisation

With the tailgate in the intermediate
position, you can cancel the stored To avoid risk of injury, make sure
position: that no one is in the vicinity of the
) Make a long press on push- boot while opening and closing.
button D. The system emits a If the tailgate is carrying extra
long audible beep. weight (snow, bicycle carrier, etc.)
) Release the push-button D. The there is a risk of it closing under
tailgate will return to the fully this load. Support the tailgate or
open position at the next use. first unload the bicycle carrier or IV
clear the snow.
When using an automatic car wash,
don’t forget to lock the vehicle so
as to avoid any risk of motorised
opening of the tailgate.

Electrical protection of
the motor
If the tailgate is repeatedly opened
and closed in quick succession, the
motor can start to overheat and then
cut out, preventing opening and
closing of the tailgate.
Allow the motor to cool down for
ten minutes without opening or clos-
ing the tailgate.
Closing in manual back-up mode re-
mains possible.

83
 ACCESS

PANORAMIC SUNROOF Sunroof open Reinitialisation

(SALOON) - Press B to first notch: closure.
After a battery disconnection or if
- Press B to second notch: auto- there has been a malfunction, you
Operation matic total closure. have to re-initialise the anti-pinch
function.
) move control B until the roof is in
the complete tilting position,
Tilted sunroof
) keep control B pressed down for
- Press A to first notch: closure. a minimum of 1 second.
IV - Press A to second notch: auto- During these operations, the anti-
matic total closure. pinch function does not operate.

Always remove the ignition key

when leaving the vehicle, even if
Sunroof closed for a short time.
- Press B to first notch: tilting. In the event of anything being
caught by the sunroof closing, you
- Press B to second notch: auto- must reverse the roof movement.
matic complete tilting.
Do this by reversing the position of
- Press A to first notch: sliding to- the control switch.
wards rear. Your sun roof is fitted with a manually- When the driver is operating the
- Press A to second notch: auto- operated blind. sunroof, they must always make
matic total sliding towards rear. sure that the passengers are not
preventing it from closing properly.
The driver must ensure that pas-
Anti-pinch sengers use the sunroof control
correctly.
An anti-pinch device stops the sun Pay special attention to where
roof from closing, whether sliding or children are when operating the
tilting. If it meets an obstacle, it re- sunroof.
opens.
The fitting of a sunroof as an ac-
cessory is prohibited.

84
 ACCESS

PANORAMIC SUNROOF Opening After a battery disconnection, or if

(TOURER) there has been a malfunction, you
) Press control A. have to re-initialise the anti-pinch
Pressing to the 1st notch allows you function:
to open the blind step by step. ) press control B to the 2nd notch
Pressing to the 2nd notch allows (fully closed),
you to fully open the blind. ) wait until the blind is fully
The blind stops in the closest pre- closed,
defined position (11 positions) as ) press control B for at least
soon as you release the control. 3 seconds.
If the blind opens randomly during a
IV
closing operation, and straight after
Closing the blind stops:
) Press control B until the blind
) Press control B. closes fully.
Press to the first notch to close the During these operations, the anti-
This comprises a tinted glass pan- blind step by step. pinch function does not operate.
oramic area 1 to improve brightness Press to the second notch to close
and vision in the passenger com- the blind completely.
partment. The blind stops at the nearest pre-
It is fitted with an electric blind 2 to set position (11 positions) as soon
help maintain a comfortable temper- as you release the control.
ature and reduce noise.
In the event of anything being
Anti-pinch caught when the blind is moving,
SEQUENTIAL ELECTRIC you must reverse the movement of
BLIND If the blind meets an obstacle whilst the blind. To do so, reverse the po-
closing, it stops and opens partially sition of the control.
again. When the driver is operating the
You must re-initialise the anti-pinch blind, he or she must always make
function within 5 seconds of the sure that the passengers are not
blind stopping: preventing it from closing properly.
) press control B until the blind is The driver must ensure that pas-
fully closed (closing in steps of a sengers use the blind correctly.
few centimetres). Pay particular attention to children
when operating the blind.

85
 ACCESS

FUEL TANK Refuelling

Capacity of the tank: approxi-

mately 71 litres*.
Additions of fuel must be of at least
5 litres to be taken into account by
Low fuel level the fuel gauge.
When the minimum level The filler neck is narrower to en-
in the tank is reached, sure that only unleaded petrol noz-
IV this warning lamp comes zles can be put in.
on in the instrument Opening the filler cap may create
panel, accompanied by an audible a noise of an inrush of air. This
warning and a message on the mul- vacuum, which is entirely normal,
tifunction screen. When it first comes is caused by the sealing of the fuel
on, there remains around 5 litres of system.
fuel in the tank. ) turn the key a quarter turn to lock
You must refuel to avoid running out and unlock the filler cap,
of fuel. ) when refuelling, place the cap on
hook A,
Opening the fuel flap ) fill the tank, but do not persist
after the third cut-off; this could With Stop & Start, never re-
cause your vehicle to malfunction. ! fuel with the system in STOP
While you are refuelling, the engine mode; you must switch off
must be stopped and the ignition the ignition with the key.
switched off.
For a petrol engine with a cata-
lytic converter, unleaded fuel is
compulsory.

) Press at the top left corner, then

pull open from the left.
* 55 litres for Slovakia.
86
 ACCESS

MISFUEL PREVENTION Quality of the fuel used for Quality of the fuel used for
(DIESEL)* petrol engines Diesel engines
Mechanical device which prevents The petrol engines are perfectly The Diesel engines are perfectly
filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle compatible with E10 type petrol compatible with biofuels which con-
with petrol. It avoids the risk of en- biofuels (containing 10 % ethanol), form to current and future European
gine damage that can result from fill- conforming to European standards standards (Diesel fuel which com-
ing with the wrong fuel. EN 228 and EN 15376. plies with standard EN 590 mixed
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % with a biofuel which complies with
prevention device appears when the ethanol) are reserved exclusively for standard EN 14214) available at the
pumps (containing up to 7 % Fatty
filler cap is removed. vehicles marketed for the use of this
Acid Methyl Ester). IV
type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The
quality of the ethanol must comply The B30 biofuel can be used in cer-
with European standard EN 15293. tain Diesel engines; however, this
For Brazil only, special vehicles are use is subject to strict application
marketed to run on fuels containing of the special servicing conditions.
up to 100 % ethanol (E100 type). Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or
diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly
prohibited (risk of damage to the en-
gine and fuel system).
Operation
When a petrol filler nozzle is intro-
duced into the fuel filler neck of your
Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact
with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a
Diesel type filler nozzle.

It remains possible to use a fuel

can to fill the tank; this must be
done slowly.
In order to ensure a good flow of
fuel, do not place the nozzle of the
fuel can in direct contact with the flap
of the misfuel prevention device. * According to country of sale.
87
 VISIBILITY

EXTERIOR LIGHTING Programming A. Main lighting mode selection ring:

CONTROLS turn it to position the symbol re-
Various automatic lighting control quired facing the mark.
Control stalk for the selection and con- modes are also available depending
trol of the various front and rear lamps on options:
providing the vehicle's lighting. - guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic illumination of head- Lamps off.
Main lighting lamps,
- directional lighting.
The various front and rear lamps of Automatic illumination of
the vehicle are designed to adapt headlamps.
the driver's visibility progressively in In some weather conditions (e.g.
relation to the climatic conditions: low temperature or humidity), the
V - sidelamps, to be seen, presence of misting on the inter-
Sidelamps only.
- dipped beam headlamps to see nal surface of the glass of the
without dazzling other drivers, headlamps and rear lamps is nor-
- main beam headlamps to see mal; it disappears after the lamps Dipped headlamps or
clearly when the road is clear. have been on for a few minutes. main beam headlamps.

Manual controls B. Stalk for switching headlamps:

pull the stalk towards you to switch
the lighting between dipped and
main beam headlamps.
Additional lighting In the lamps off and sidelamps
modes, the driver can switch on the
Other lamps are fitted to fulfil the re- main beam headlamps temporarily
quirements of particular driving con- ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
ditions: pull on the stalk.
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a
distance,
- front foglamps for even better Displays
forward vision,
- directional headlamps for im- Illumination of the corresponding indi-
proved visibility when cornering, cator lamp in the instrument panel con-
The lighting is controlled directly by firms that the lighting selected is on.
- daytime running lamps to be the driver by means of the ring A
seen during the day. and the stalk B.

88
 VISIBILITY

C. Foglamps selection ring.

The foglamps operate with the side-
lamps and the dipped and main
beam headlamps.
In good or rainy weather, both day
and night, use of the front foglamps
Model with rear foglamps Model with front and rear and the rear foglamps is prohibited.
only foglamps In these situations, the power of their
beams may dazzle other drivers.
They should only be used in fog or
falling snow.
In these weather conditions, it is
your responsibility to switch on the
foglamps and dipped headlamps
manually as the sunshine sensor V
may detect sufficient light.
Do not forget to switch off the front
and rear foglamps when they are
no longer needed.

- 1st turn forwards: rear foglamps on. - 1st turn forwards: front foglamps on.
- 1st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off. - 2nd turn forwards: rear foglamps on.
- 1st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.
Lighting left on
- 2nd turn rearwards: front foglamps
off. When a front door is opened with
the ignition off and in manual ligh-
ting mode, an audible signal warns
the driver if the vehicle's lighting is
still on.
In this case, switching off the ligh-
ting stops the audible signal.
With the ignition off, if the dipped
headlamps remain on, they will
switch off automatically after thirty
minutes to prevent discharging of
the battery.

89
 VISIBILITY

Daytime-running lamps Manual guide-me-home Automatic illumination of

lighting headlamps
System which switches on special
lamps at the front, to make the ve- Temporarily keeping the dipped The sidelamps and dipped beam
hicle more visible by day. beam headlamps on after the vehi- headlamps are switched on automati-
They light up automatically and per- cle's ignition has been switched off cally, without any action on the part of
makes the driver's exit easier when the driver, when a low level of external
manently, when the engine is run- light is detected or in certain cases of
ning, if: the light is poor.
activation of the windscreen wipers.
- The function is activated* in the As soon as the brightness returns to a
"Main Menu" of the instrument sufficient level or after the windscreen
panel screen. wipers are switched off, the lamps are
- The lighting control is at position 0 switched off automatically.
or AUTO.
V - All the headlamps are off.
You can deactivate* this function
using the "Main Menu" of the instru-
ment panel screen.

Switching on
) With the ignition off, "flash" the
headlamps using the lighting
stalk. Activation
) A further "headlamp flash" ) Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position.
switches the function off. The automatic illumination of head-
lamps is accompanied by a message
in the instrument panel screen.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting Deactivation
switches off automatically after a set ) Turn ring A to a position other
time. than "AUTO". Deactivation is
accompanied by a message in
the instrument panel screen.

* According to country.
90
 VISIBILITY

Linked with the automatic MANUAL HEADLAMP AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT

"Guide-me-home" lighting ADJUSTMENT OF DIRECTIONAL
The link with the automatic illumi- HEADLAMPS
nation of headlamps provides the
"guide-me-home" lighting with the
following additional options:
- selection of the duration of ligh-
ting for 15, 30 or 60 seconds in
the vehicle parameters on the in-
strument panel screen configu-
ration menu,
- automatic activation of "guide-
me-home" lighting when auto-
matic illumination of headlamps V
is in operation.
To avoid dazzling other road users,
the height of the halogen bulb head-
Operating fault lamps must be adjusted according To avoid causing a nuisance to other
In the event of a fault with the sun- to the load in the vehicle. road users, this system corrects
shine sensor, the lighting comes on 0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats. the height of the xenon headlamp
and a message appears in the instru- -. 3 people. beams automatically and when sta-
ment panel screen, accompanied by tionary, depending on the load in the
an audible signal. 1. 5 people.
vehicle.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a -. Intermediate setting.
qualified workshop. 2. 5 people + maximum authorised If a fault occurs, this
loads. warning lamp comes
-. Intermediate setting. on in the instrument
panel, accompanied by
3. Driver + maximum authorised an audible signal and a
In fog or snow, the sunshine sen- loads.
sor may detect sufficient light. message in the instru-
Therefore, the lighting will not Initial setting is position "0". ment panel screen.
come on automatically. The system then places your head-
Do not cover the sunshine sen- lamps in the lowest position.
sor, linked with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror; Do not touch the xenon bulbs.
the associated functions would no Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
longer operate. qualified workshop.

91
 VISIBILITY

DIRECTIONAL LIGHTING Deactivation

This function is deactivated:
- below a certain angle of rotation
"Cornering lighting" function of the steering wheel,
With dipped or main beams, this - when stationary or at very low
function provides additional lighting speed,
for the inside of a bend, when the - when reverse gear is engaged,
vehicle speed is below 25 mph - when the directional headlamps
(approx 40 km/h). are switched off.
This lighting is most useful when
travelling at low and medium speed
(urban driving, winding road, inter-
V sections, parking manoeuvres...).
without cornering lighting

Activation
This function is activated:
- when the direction indicator is
activated,
- from a certain angle of rotation of
the steering wheel.

with cornering lighting

92
 VISIBILITY

Directional headlamps Programming

function
The function is activated or deac-
When the dipped or main beam tivated via the instrument panel
headlamps are on, this function, as- screen "Main Menu".
sociated with the "cornering lighting" To do this, select "Vehicle parameters\
function, enables the light beam to Lighting\Directional headlamps".
follow the direction of the road.
The use of this function, linked with
the xenon headlamps only, consid-
erably improves the quality of your
lighting when cornering.

V
without directional lighting Operating fault
If a fault occurs, this warning
lamp flashes in the instru-
ment panel, accompanied
by a message in the multi-
function screen.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

When stationary or moving at very

low speed or when reverse gear is
engaged, the function is inactive.
The status of the function remains
in the memory when the ignition is
with directional lighting switched off.

93
 VISIBILITY

WIPER CONTROLS Manual controls Rear wiper (Tourer)

System for selection and control of The wiper commands are issued di-
the various front and rear wiping rectly by the driver by means of the
modes for the elimination of rain and stalk A and the ring B.
cleaning.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers
are designed to improve the driver's
visibility progressively according to
the climatic conditions.

Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk:
V
B. rear wiper selection ring:
fast (heavy rain),

normal (moderate rain), park,

intermittent (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle),

park, intermittent wipe,

Programming single wipe (press down and

Various automatic wiper control release), wash-wipe (set duration).
modes are also available according or
to the following options:
- automatic rain sensitive wind- automatic, then single
screen wipers, wipe (see following
page). If a significant accumulation of
- rear wiping on engaging reverse snow or ice is present, or when
gear. using a tailgate bicycle carrier, de-
activate the automatic rear wiper
via the instrument panel screen
configuration menu.

94
 VISIBILITY

Reverse gear Automatic rain sensitive Switching off

When reverse gear is engaged, the windscreen wipers This is controlled manually by the
rear wiper operates if the windscreen driver by moving stalk A upwards
wipers are operating. The windscreen wipers operate au- and returning it to position "0".
tomatically, without any action on the
part of the driver, if rain is detected It is accompanied by a message in
(sensor behind the rear view mirror), the instrument panel screen.
Programming adapting their speed to the intensity The automatic wiping must be reac-
of the rainfall. tivated if the ignition has been off for
The function is activated or deac- more than one minute, by pushing
tivated via the instrument panel stalk A downwards.
screen configuration menu.
This function is activated by default.
V
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction
Windscreen and headlamp occurs, the wipers will operate in in-
wash termittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
) Pull the windscreen wiper stalk dealer or a qualified workshop.
towards you. The windscreen
wash then the windscreen wip-
ers operate for a fixed period.
The headlamp washers only operate Activation
when the dipped beam headlamps
are on. This is controlled manually by the
driver by moving stalk A to the
"AUTO" position. Do not cover the rain sensor, linked
It is accompanied by a message in with the sunshine sensor and loca-
the instrument panel screen. ted in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic wip-
ing when using an automatic car
wash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until
the windscreen is completely clear
of ice before activating the auto-
matic wiping.

95
 VISIBILITY

Special position of the COURTESY LAMPS In this position, the courtesy

windscreen wipers lamp comes on gradually:
Front courtesy lamp
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door is opened,
- when the key is removed from
the ignition,
- when the remote control locking
button is activated, in order to lo-
cate your vehicle.

V It switches off gradually:

This position permits release of the
windscreen wiper blades. - when the vehicle is locked,
It is used for cleaning or replacement - when the ignition is switched on,
1. Front courtesy lamp
of the blades. It can also be useful, - 30 seconds after the last door is
in winter, to detach the blades from 2. Map reading lamps closed.
the windscreen.
In the moment following switching Rear courtesy lamp
the ignition off, any action on the Lighting off.
stalk positions the wipers vertically
on the windscreen.

Lighting on.
To park the wipers after this has
been done, switch on the ignition
and operate the stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of
the "flat-blade" wiper blades, it is
advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using
soapy water, 1. Rear courtesy lamp
- avoid using them to retain card- 2. Map reading lamps
board on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs
of wear.
96
 VISIBILITY

Panoramic sunroof rear

In lighting on mode, different light- reading lamps (Tourer)
ing times are available:
- with the ignition off, approxi-
mately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, ap-
proximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.

Map reading lamps

) With the ignition on, press the V
corresponding switch.
With the key in position or with the
ignition on:
) Press the corresponding switch.
The reading lamp concerned comes
on for ten minutes.

The rear reading lamps come on:

- when the key is removed from
the ignition,
- when the vehicle is unlocked.
They switch off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on.

97
 VISIBILITY

INTERIOR MOOD LIGHTING Central console Lighting for door opening

controls
Your vehicle is equipped with interior The lamps are located on the roof
mood lighting for the centre console console, near the front interior lamp.
and the door handles. They illuminate the central console.

Operation
These lamps are activated with the
automatic illumination of headlamps,
when the ambient light is poor. They
are deactivated when the instrument
panel is off.
V The intensity of the lighting varies
along with that of the instrument This is located on the front and rear
panel. interior door opening controls.
) Press buttons A to increase or re- The rear door opening controls light-
duce the intensity of the lighting. ing is deactivated if the child lock
is on.

98
 VISIBILITY

WELCOME LIGHTING

The welcome lighting is made up of:

- The interior (roof) lamps.
- The floor lighting.
- The pavement lighting when a
door is open.

Floor lighting Pavement lighting

V

In the front of the vehicle, when a With the door open, this illuminates
door is opened, this illuminates the the ground next to the vehicle.
interior of the vehicle.

99
 FITTINGS

SUN VISOR Cooled glove box SKI FLAP

VI
) With the ignition on, lift the flap; the ) To open the glove box, pull on A flap in the backrest, located to the
mirror is illuminated automatically. the handle and lower the lid. rear of the armrest, facilitates the
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold The glove box has a manually clos- carrying of long objects.
the visor downwards. able air vent B.
To open
It can be disengaged from its central It has 2 or 3 sockets C to connect
fixing and pivoted over to the side audio/video equipment and a hold- ) Lower the rear armrest.
windows if required. er for a SIM card (see "Audio and
Telematics"). ) Pull the flap handle down.
It has automatic illumination. ) Lower the flap.
It provides access to the dashboard ) Load the objects from inside the
fusebox. boot.

Ensure that the objects are well se-

The glove box should be cured and that they do not impede
! kept closed while driving. the operation of the gear lever.

100
 FITTINGS

MATS Adjustment
To optimise your driving position:
To avoid any interference with the ) lift the control A,
pedals:
) push the armrest forwards.
- only use mats which are suit-
able for the fixings already The armrest returns to its initial posi-
present in the vehicle. The use tion when you push it rearwards.
of these fixings is essential,
- never fit more than 1 mat.
The use of a mat not approved by
CITROËN may obstruct access to
the pedals and hinder the cruise Cup-holder/USB port
control/speed limiter function.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
Equipment available for the driver are fitted with a 3rd fixing located in
and front passenger. the pedal area to avoid any risk of VI
interference with the pedals.
Removing
) Slide the seat back as far as FRONT ARMREST
possible,
) unclip the fixings,
) remove the fixings, then the mat.

The front armrest includes a cup

Refitting holder and a USB port.
) Position the mat correctly, The USB port allows connection of
a portable device, such as a USB
) clip the fixings, memory stick, sending the audio
) check that the mat is held is files to your audio system so that
place correctly. they can be heard via the vehicle's
speakers.
) Lift the armrest to access the cup
Comfort and storage system for the holder or the USB port.
driver and front passenger.
101
 FITTINGS

Driver's oddments tray Cup-holder SIDE BLINDS

The rear cup-holder A is located in
the rear central armrest.
) Lower the rear armrest.
) Pull forwards to extract the cup-
holder.

Storage
) Lift up the upper part of the rear
central armrest to access storage
space B.
) Pull the handle towards you.
VI ) Pull on the tab A and position the
blind on the hook B.
REAR ARMREST 12 V ACCESSORIES SOCKET REAR BLIND (SALOON)

Comfort and storage system for the This is located in the rear ashtray. ) pull on the tab C to unreel the
rear passengers. Max power: 100 W. blind,
) position the blind on the hooks D.

102
 FITTINGS

BOOT FITTINGS (SALOON) Luggage securing rings

) Use the 4 securing rings on the
boot floor to secure your lug-
gage.
For safety reasons in the event of
sharp braking, you are advised to
place heavy objects as far forward
in the boot as possible.

VI

1. Battery location for vehicles with 3. Boot lamp.

V6 HDi engine. 4. Location for 6 CD changer.
2. Boot floor (spare wheel storage).

103
 FITTINGS

BOOT FITTINGS (TOURER)

VI
1. Hook 1. Luggage-cover blind 1. Boot lamp
For shopping bags. (see details on following page) 2. 12 V accessories socket
2. Torch 2. Luggage securing rings (100 W maximum)
To recharge, return it to its storage Use the 4 stowing rings provided Cigarette lighter type 12 volt
position. on the boot floor to secure your socket. It is located on the rear
loads. right-hand trim.
3. Storage net or Battery compart-
ment (for vehicles with 3 litre For safety reasons in the event 3. Loading height control
V6 HDi engine). of sharp braking, you are ad- You can change the height of the
This provides access to the battery. vised to place heavy objects as vehicle to make loading or un-
far forwards as possible. loading easier.
3. Hooks 4. Hook
These allow a cargo net to be For shopping bags.
fitted (see details on following 5. Storage net or closed housing
page).
Location for the 6 CD changer.

104
 FITTINGS

LUGGAGE COVER (TOURER) High load retaining net

(Tourer)

To roll up To install VI
) Press the handle (PRESS) gently. ) Position the left-hand end of the
The luggage cover rolls up auto- luggage cover roller in its loca-
matically. tion B behind the rear bench
The moving part A can be folded seat.
along the rear bench seat backrest. ) Compress the roller control 1 Hooked onto the special upper and
and put the roller in place in its lower fixings, this permits use of the
location C on the right. entire loading volume up to the roof:
) Release the control to secure - behind the rear seats (row 2),
the luggage cover. - behind the front seats (row 1)
) Unroll it to its fastening on the when the rear seats are folded.
rear pillar. When positioning the net, check that
the strap loops are visible from the
boot; this will make slackening or
tightening easier.

To remove
) Compress the control 1 and lift
the luggage cover on the right
then on the left to remove it. 105
 FITTINGS

Row 1 Row 2
To use it in row 1: To use it in row 2:
) fold down the ) open the cov-
backs of the ers 4 of the
rear seats, corresponding
) open the cov- upper fixings,
ers 3 of the
corresponding
upper fixings, ) from the rear bench seat, unroll
) unroll the high load retaining net the high load retaining net, push-
and position one of the ends of ing it to detach it from the retaining
the net's metal bar in the cor- hooks,
responding fixing cover. Check ) position one of the ends of the
that the hook is secured in the net's metal bar in the corre-
rail located inside the cover 3, sponding fixing cover. Check
VI ) pull the high load retaining net's that the hook is secured in the
metal bar to position the other rail located inside the cover,
hook in the second fixing cover. ) position the other hook in the
Installation second fixing cover and pull the
) fold down the backs of the rear metal bar towards you.
seats,
) position the high load retaining
net roller above the two rails 1
located behind the rear seats
(2/3 bench seat). The two notch-
es 2 must be placed above the
two rails,
) slide the two rails 1 into the
notches 2 and push the roller
(lengthways) from right to left to
secure it,
) reposition the rear seat backs.

106
 CHILD SAFETY

GENERAL POINTS RELATING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

TO CHILD SEATS
Although one of CITROËN’s main "Rearwards-facing" "Forwards-facing"
criteria when designing your vehi- When a "rearwards-facing" child When a "forwards-facing" child seat
cle, the safety of your children also seat is installed on the front pas- is installed on the front passenger
depends on you. senger seat, it is essential that the seat, adjust the vehicle’s seat to the
For maximum safety, please observe passenger airbag is deactivated. intermediate longitudinal position
the following recommendations: Otherwise, the child would risk with the seat back upright and leave
- in accordance with European being seriously injured or killed if the passenger airbag activated.
regulations, all children under the airbag were to inflate.
the age of 12 or less than one
and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats
suited to their weight, on seats
fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX
mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in
your vehicle for carrying chil-
dren are the rear seats, VII
- a child weighing less than 9 kg
must travel in the "rearwards-
facing" position both in the
front and in the rear.

Intermediate longitudinal
position

CITROËN recommends that

children should travel in the rear
seats of your vehicle:
- "rearwards-facing" up to the
age of 2,
- "forwards-facing" over the
age of 2. * The rules for carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
current legislation in your country.
107
 CHILD SAFETY

Refer to the advice given on the label

present on both sides of the passenger's
sun visor.
Passenger airbag OFF

VII

To assure the safety of your child, you must deactivate the passenger's
! front airbag when you install a child seat in the rearwards facing position
on the front passenger's seat.
Otherwise, there is a risk that the child could be seriously injured or killed
if the airbag were deployed.

108
 CHILD SAFETY

CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN

CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt:

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rearwards-facing position.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

VII

L4
L3 "KLIPPAN Optima"
"RECARO Start'' From the age of 6 years
(approximately 22 kg),
the booster is used on its own.

L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.

109
 CHILD SAFETY

POSITIONS FOR CHILD SEATS SECURED USING THE SEAT BELT

In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of universally approved child
seats (a) using a seat belt, depending on the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.

Weight of child

Seat position(s) Groups 0 (c) Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

and 0+
9 to 18 kg 15 to 25 kg 22 to 36 kg
< 13 kg

Front passenger (b) with U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)

height adjustment
Row 1
Front passenger (b)
VII without height U U U U
adjustment

Outer rear U U U U

Row 2

Centre rear U U U U

(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Consult the current legislation for your country before driving with your child in this seat.
(c) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Shells and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
U: seat position suitable for installation of universally approved rearwards-facing and/or forwards-facing child seat.
U (R): As U, with the vehicle seat, which must be adjusted to the highest position.

110
 CHILD SAFETY

"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS In the rear

Your vehicle has been approved in This ISOFIX mounting system pro-
accordance with the new ISOFIX vides fast, reliable and safe fitting
regulations. of the child seat in your vehicle.
The outer rear seats are fitted with The ISOFIX child seats are fitted
regulation ISOFIX mountings. with two locks which are secured
easily on the two rings A, following
installation of the guides (supplied
with the seat).
Some also have an upper strap
which is attached to the ring B or C.
To attach this strap in the rear, remove
the vehicle seat's head restraint and
stow it. Lift the cover on the rear shelf
(Saloon) or the roof (Tourer). Then
fix the hook on the ring B or C and
Saloon tighten the upper strap.
These are three rings for each outer The incorrect installation of a child
rear seat: seat in a vehicle compromises the
child's protection in the event of an VII
- two lower rings A, located be- accident.
tween the vehicle seat back and
cushion, indicated by a label, For information regarding the
ISOFIX child seats which can be
- an upper ring B, fixed to the rear installed in your vehicle, consult
shelf, concealed under a flap the table of positions for fitting
with the logo TOP TETHER be- ISOFIX child seats.
hind the head restraint.

Tourer
- two lower rings A, located be-
tween the vehicle seat back and
cushion, indicated by a label,
- an upper ring C, fixed to the
roof on the boot side, concealed
under a flap with the logo TOP
TETHER.

111
 CHILD SAFETY

ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS

The incorrect installation of a child seat Installing a booster seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's The chest part of the seat belt must
protection in the event of an accident. be positioned on the child's shoulder
When installing a child seat using the without touching the neck.
seat belt, check that the seat belt is Ensure that the lap part of the seat
tightened correctly on the child seat belt passes correctly over the child's
and that it secures the child seat firmly thighs.
on the seat of your vehicle.
CITROËN recommends the use of a
Remember to fasten the seat belts or booster seat which has a back, fit-
the child seat harnesses keeping the ted with a seat belt guide at shoulder
slack in relation to the child's body to a level.
minimum, even for short journeys.
For optimum installation of the "for- As a safety precaution, do not leave:
wards-facing" child seat, ensure that - one or more children alone and
the back of the child seat is in contact unsupervised in a vehicle,
with the back of the vehicle's seat and
that the head restraint does not cause - a child or an animal in a vehicle
VII any discomfort. which is exposed to the sun, with
the windows closed,
If the head restraint has to be removed,
ensure that it is stored or attached se- - the keys within reach of children
curely to prevent it from being thrown inside the vehicle.
around the vehicle in the event of sharp To prevent accidental opening of the
braking. doors, use the "Child lock".
Children under the age of 10 must not Take care not to open the rear win-
travel in the "forwards-facing" position dows by more than one third.
on the front passenger seat, unless To protect young children from the
the rear seats are already occupied by rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the
other children, cannot be used or are rear windows.
absent.
Deactivate the passenger airbag* when
a "rearwards-facing" child seat is in-
stalled on the front seat. Otherwise, the
child would risk being seriously injured
or killed if the airbag were to inflate. * According to country and current
local legislation.

112
 CHILD SAFETY

ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE

RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1)

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed in the forwards-facing position.

Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B or C, referred to
as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
VII

This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attached
to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer’s installation guide.

113
 CHILD SAFETY

POSITIONS FOR FITTING ISOFIX CHILD SEATS

In conformity with European law (ECE 16), this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of ISOFIX child seats
to seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mounting points.
For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defined by a letter from A to G, is shown on
the child seat to the right of the ISOFIX logo.

Weight of child/Age given as a guide

Up to 10 kg
Up to 10 kg (group 0)
(group 0) 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Up to 13 kg
Up to around Approx 1 to 3 years
6 months (group 0+)
Up to around 1 year

Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell "Rearwards-facing" "Rearwards-facing" "Forwards-facing"

ISOFIX size class F G C D E C D A B B1

VII
Universal and semi-universal
ISOFIX child seats can be in-
stalled on: X IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
- Front passenger seat

- Outer rear seats IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

- Centre rear seat Non ISOFIX seat position

IUF: Seat position suitable for installation of an Isofix Universal "Forwards-facing" seat attached using the top tether.
IL-SU: Seat position suitable for installation of an ISOFIX Semi-Universal child seat, either:
- "rearwards-facing" fitted with an upper strap or a stay
- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,
- a shell fitted with an upper strap or a stay.
To attach the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" paragraph.
X: Seat not suitable for installation of an ISOFIX seat of the size class indicated
* The ISOFIX shell, fixed to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.
114
 CHILD SAFETY

ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK Deactivation

) Press button A again.
Remote control system to prevent The indicator lamp in button A goes
opening of the rear doors using their off, accompanied by a message in
interior controls and use of the rear the instrument panel screen.
electric windows. This indicator lamp remains off until
the child lock is activated.

Any other status of the indicator

lamp indicates a fault with the elec-
tric child lock. Have it checked by a
CITROËN or a qualified workshop.

This system is independent and in

no circumstances does it take the
place of the central locking control. VII
Check the status of the child lock
The control is located on the driver's each time you switch on the ignition.
door, with the electric window controls. Always remove the key from the
ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is deactivated au-
Activation tomatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
) Press button A.
The indicator lamp in button A comes
on, accompanied by a message in
the instrument panel screen.

115
 SAFETY

DIRECTION INDICATORS HAZARD WARNING LAMPS HORN

Selection of the left or right direction A visual warning by means of the di- Audible warning to alert other road
indicators to signal a change of di- rection indicators to alert other road users to an imminent danger.
rection of the vehicle. users to a vehicle breakdown, towing
or accident.

) Press the left or right-hand part

of the fixed centred controls
steering wheel.

Use the horn moderately and only

in the following cases:
) Left: lower the lighting stalk be- ) Press this button, the direction
yond the point of resistance. indicators flash. - immediate danger,
) Right: raise the lighting stalk be- They can operate with the ignition off. - overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,
VIII yond the point of resistance. - when approaching an area
where there is no visibility.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
"Motorway" function EMERGENCY OR
When braking in an emergency, ASSISTANCE CALL
) Press briefly upwards or down- depending on the deceleration, the
wards, without going beyond the hazard warning lamps come on au-
point of resistance; the direction tomatically.
indicators will flash 3 times. They switch off automatically the
first time you accelerate.
This system allows you to make an
) You can also switch them off by emergency or assistance call to the
pressing the button. emergency services or to the dedi-
cated CITROËN service.
For more information on the use of
this function, refer to the "Audio and
telematics" section.
116
 SAFETY

TYRE UNDER-INFLATION Tyre pressures OK display Under-inflated tyre

DETECTION
System which automatically checks
the pressures of the tyres while
driving.

Choice of detection
This function provides warning of
tyres that are under-inflated or punc-
tured. automatic detection
) Press on button A (CHECK).
Automatic detection
The system indicates to you that the
Sensors monitor the tyre pressures. tyres are correctly inflated.
In the event of an anomaly, a mes- This information is only available on
sage will appear in the instrument request by the driver.
panel screen.

Driver request detection

You can check the tyre pressures at
any time.
detection on request
VIII
) Press on button A (CHECK); the
information will be displayed in
the instrument panel screen. Automatic detection:
A message indicates which tyre is
under-inflated.

Driver request detection:

The vehicle outline indicates the un-
der-inflated tyre(s).
The message is accompanied by il-
lumination of the SERVICE warning
lamp and an audible beep.
) Check the tyre pressures as
soon as possible.

117
 SAFETY

Punctured tyre Wheel not monitored

) If you have fitted wheels that
are not equipped with tyre defla-
tion detection (wheels with snow
tyres, etc.), contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.

automatic detection automatic detection

The deflation detection system is a

driving aid, but which does not ab-
solve the driver from the need to be
vigilant and responsible.
This system does not dispense
with the requirement to check
the tyres on a regular basis (see
"Identification markings") to ensure
VIII detection on request detection on request optimum vehicle behaviour and to
avoid premature tyre wear under
certain conditions (high load, high
Automatic detection: Automatic detection: speed).
A message indicates which tyre is A message indicates to you which Do not forget to check the tyre
punctured. wheel is not monitored. pressure of the spare wheel.
Any repair or replacement of a tyre
Driver request detection: Driver request detection: on a wheel that is equipped with
a sensor must be carried out by
The vehicle outline indicates the The vehicle outline indicates the a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
punctured tyre(s). wheel(s) which is/are not monitored. workshop.
The message is accompanied by ) The message is accompanied The system may suffer from tem-
illumination of the STOP warning by illumination of the SERVICE porary interference caused by
lamp and an audible beep. warning lamp and an audible electro-magnetic transmissions on
beep. have it checked by a frequencies close to that use by
CITROËN dealer or a qualified the system.
workshop.
118
 SAFETY

BRAKING ASSISTANCE Operating fault Emergency braking assistance

SYSTEMS
System which, in an emergency,
Group of supplementary systems If this warning lamp comes enables you to obtain the optimum
which help you to obtain optimum on, accompanied by an braking pressure more quickly, thus
braking in complete safety in emer- audible signal and a mes- reducing the stopping distance.
gency situations: sage in the instrument panel
screen, it indicates a fault with the
- anti-lock braking system (ABS), anti-lock braking system which could Activation
- electronic brake force distribution result in loss of control of the vehicle It is triggered by the speed at which
(EBFD), when braking. the brake pedal is pressed.
- emergency braking assistance The effect of this is a reduction in
(EBA). If this warning lamp comes the resistance of the pedal and an
on, together with the STOP increase in braking efficiency.
and ABS warning lamps, ac-
companied by an audible sig-
nal and a message in the instrument
Anti-lock braking system panel screen, it indicates a fault with
and electronic brake force the electronic brake force distribution When braking in an emergency,
distribution which could result in loss of control of press firmly without releasing the
the vehicle when braking. pressure.
Linked systems which improve the You must stop as soon as it is
stability and manoeuvrability of your safe to do so.
vehicle when braking, in particular
In both cases, contact a CITROËN VIII
on poor or slippery surfaces.
dealer or a qualified workshop.

Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes
into operation automatically when
there is a risk of wheel lock. When replacing wheels (tyres and
Normal operation of the ABS may rims), ensure that they conform to
make itself felt by slight vibration of the manufacturer's recommenda-
the brake pedal. tions.

When braking in an emergency,

press very firmly without releasing
the pressure.

119
 SAFETY

TRAJECTORY CONTROL For vehicles with Hydractive III + Deactivation

SYSTEMS suspension, manual adjustment of In exceptional conditions (starting a
ground clearance to the intermediate vehicle which is bogged down, stuck
position improves further the ability in snow, on soft ground...), it may be
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) to make progress in deep snow (see advisable to deactivate the ASR and
and electronic stability the relevant paragraph). ESP systems, so that the wheels
programme (ESP) The use of snow tyres is strongly can move freely and regain grip.
recommended on surfaces with low
The anti-slip regulation (also known adhesion.
as Traction Control) optimises trac-
tion to prevent skidding of the wheels,
by acting on the brakes of the driving
wheels and on the engine.
The electronic stability programme
acts on the brake of one or more
wheels and on the engine to keep Activation
the vehicle on the trajectory required
by the driver, within the limits of the These systems are activated auto-
laws of physics. matically each time the vehicle is
started.
They come into operation in the event
Intelligent traction control of a grip or trajectory problem.
system ("Snow motion")
VIII
Your vehicle has a system to im- ) Press the "ESP OFF" button,
prove traction on snow: intelligent This is indicated by flashing
of this warning lamp in the located in the middle of the dash-
traction control. board.
instrument panel.
This system detects situations
of low adhesion that might make
moving off and progress difficult If this warning lamp comes on
on deep fresh snow or compacted in the instrument panel and
snow. the indicator lamp in the button
comes on, this indicates that
In these situations the intelligent the ASR and ESP systems
traction control system regulates are deactivated.
the amount of wheel slip to optimise
the traction and trajectory control of It is recommended that these systems
your vehicle. be reactivated as soon as possible.

120
 SAFETY

Reactivation SEAT BELTS The pretensioning seat belts are

Below 30 mph (50 km/h), press the active when the ignition is on.
"ESP OFF" button to reactivate The force limiter reduces the pres-
these systems. sure of the seat belt against the
They are reactivated automatically chest of the occupant, so increasing
above 30 mph (50 km/h) or every his protection.
time the ignition is switched off.

Operating fault Fastening

If this warning lamp comes ) Pull the belt down in front of you
on, accompanied by an in a steady movement, making
audible signal and a mes- sure that it does not become
sage in the instrument panel twisted.
screen, this indicates a fault with ) Press the fastening into its buckle.
these systems. ) Check that it is properly secured
Have it checked by a CITROËN and that the automatic locking
dealer or a qualified workshop. mechanism operates correctly
by pulling sharply on the belt
strap.
) The lap strap should be posi-
The ESP/ASR systems offer ex- tioned as low down as possible in VIII
ceptional safety in normal driving, the lap and as tight as possible.
but this should not encourage the ) The diagonal strap should be
driver to take extra risks or drive at Front seat belts positioned across the chest and
high speed. away from the neck.
The correct operation of these sys- The front seat belts are fitted with a Each belt has a reel that adjusts its
tems depends on observation of pretensioning system and force limiter. length automatically to the girth of
the manufacturer's recommenda- This system improves safety in the front the seat occupant.
tions regarding the wheels (tyres seats in the event of a front impact.
and rims), the braking components,
the electronic components and ob- Depending on the seriousness of the
servation of the assembly and re- impact, the pretensioning system in-
pair procedures used by CITROËN stantly tightens the seat belt against
dealers. the body of the occupant.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

121
 SAFETY

Height adjustment Rear seat belts

When correctly adjusted, the seat Each rear seat is fitted with a three-
belt shoulder strap falls over the point inertia reel seat belt with force
middle of the shoulder. limiter.
) To adjust the belt, squeeze the
control and slide it in the direc-
tion required.
VIII Fastening
) Pull the strap, then insert the
Unfastening tongue in the buckle.
) To unfasten the belt, press on ) Check that the seat belt is fas-
the red button in the buckle. tened correctly by pulling the
strap.
The belt retracts automatically when
not in use.
Unfastening
) Press the red button on the
buckle.

122
 SAFETY

The driver must ensure that passen- In order to be effective, a seat belt Recommendations for children
gers use the seat belts correctly and must: Use a suitable child seat if the pas-
that they are all restrained securely - be tightened as close to the body senger is less than 12 years old or
before setting off. as possible, shorter than one and a half metres.
Wherever you are seated in the ve- - be pulled in front of you with a Never use the same seat belt to se-
hicle, always fasten your seat belt, smooth movement, checking cure more than one person.
even for short journeys. that it does not twist, Never allow a child to travel on
Do not interchange the seat belt - be used to restrain only one person, your lap.
buckles as they will not fulfil their
role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or
fraying,
The seat belts are fitted with an
inertia reel permitting automatic - not be converted or modified to
avoid affecting its performance. In the event of an impact
adjustment of the length of the strap
to your size. The seat belt is stowed Depending on the nature and se-
automatically when not in use. riousness of the impact, the pre-
tensioning device may be deployed
Before and after use, ensure that the before and independently of the
seat belt is reeled in correctly. airbags. Deployment of the preten-
In accordance with current safety
The lower part of the strap must be regulations, for all repairs on your sioners is accompanied by a slight
positioned as low as possible on the vehicle, go to a qualified workshop discharge of harmless smoke and
pelvis. with the skills and equipment need- a noise, due to the activation of the
The upper part must be positioned ed, which a CITROËN dealer is able pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated
in the hollow of the shoulder. to provide. in the system. VIII
The inertia reels are fitted with an Have your seat belts checked reg- In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
automatic locking device which ularly by a CITROËN dealer or a comes on.
comes into operation in the event qualified workshop, particularly if the Following an impact, have the seat
of a collision, emergency braking or straps show signs of damage. belts system checked, and if neces-
if the vehicle rolls over. You can re- Clean the seat belt straps with soapy sary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer
lease the device by pulling firmly on water or a textile cleaning product, or a qualified workshop.
the strap and releasing it so that it sold by CITROËN dealers.
reels in slightly.
After folding or moving a seat or rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt
is positioned and reeled in correctly.

123
 SAFETY

AIRBAGS
System designed to maximise the
safety of the occupants (with the
exception of the rear centre pas-
senger) in the event of violent col-
lisions. It supplements the action of
the force-limiting seat belts.

If a collision occurs, the electronic

detectors record and analyse the
front and side impacts sustained in
the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact,
the airbags are deployed instant-
ly and protect the occupants of
the vehicle (with the exception of
the rear centre passenger); im-
mediately after the impact, the
airbags deflate rapidly so that
they do not hinder visibility or the
exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear im-
VIII pact or in certain roll-over con-
ditions, the airbags will not be
deployed; the seat belt alone Impact detection zones
is sufficient to provide optimum
protection in these situations.
Deployment of the airbag(s) is ac-
A. Front impact zone. companied by a slight emission of
B. Side impact zone. harmless smoke and a noise, due
to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridge incorporated in the system.
The airbags do not operate when This smoke is not harmful, but sen-
the ignition is switched off. sitive individuals may experience
slight irritation.
This equipment will only operate
once. If a second impact occurs The noise of the detonation may
(during the same or a subsequent result in a slight loss of hearing for
accident), the airbag will not operate. a short time.

124
 SAFETY

Front airbags Deactivation Activation

When you remove the child seat,
System which protects the head and turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to
chest of the driver and front passen- reactivate the airbag and so assure
ger in the event of a front impact. the safety of your front passenger in
The driver's airbag is fitted in the the event of an impact.
centre of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is fitted in
the dashboard above the glove box.

Operating fault
If this symbol appears in the
instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible
Only the front passenger's airbag warning and a message,
can be deactivated: contact a CITROËN dealer or a
) with the ignition off, insert the qualified workshop to have the sys-
key in the passenger airbag de- tem checked. The airbags may no
activation switch 1, longer be deployed in the event of a
) turn it to the "OFF" position, serious impact.
) then, remove the key keeping If this warning lamp flashes, VIII
the switch in this position. contact a CITROËN dealer
Deployment or a qualified workshop.
This warning lamp comes on
The airbags are deployed simultane- in the roof console screen
ously, unless the passenger's front when the ignition is on and
airbag is deactivated, in the event of until the airbag is reactivated.
a serious front impact to all or part of
the front impact zone A, in the lon-
gitudinal centreline of the vehicle on To assure the safety of your child,
a horizontal plane and directed from the passenger's airbag must be
the front to the rear of the vehicle. deactivated when you install a If both airbag warning lamps come
The front airbag inflates between the "rearwards-facing" child seat on on continuously, do not install a
front occupant of the vehicle and the the front passenger seat. "rearwards-facing" child seat on
dashboard to cushion their forward Otherwise, the child would risk be- the front passenger seat.
movement. ing seriously injured or killed if the Have it checked by a CITROËN
airbag were deployed. dealer or a qualified workshop.
125
 SAFETY

Lateral airbags* Impact detection zones Deployment

It is deployed at the same time as
System which protects the driver the corresponding lateral airbag in
and front passenger in the event of the event of a serious side impact to
a serious side impact in order to limit all or part of the side impact zone B,
the risk of injury to the chest. perpendicular to the longitudinal cen-
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the treline of the vehicle on a horizontal
front seat back frame, on the outer plane and directed from the outside
side. towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between
the front or rear occupant of the ve-
hicle and the windows.

A. Front impact zone.

In the event of a minor impact or
B. Side impact zone. bump on the side of the vehicle or
if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag
may not be deployed.
The airbag is not deployed in the
Curtain airbags* event of a rear or front collision.

VIII System which protects the driver

Deployment and passengers (with the exception
It is deployed unilaterally in the of the rear centre passenger) in the
event of a serious side impact ap- event of a serious side impact in or-
plied to all or part of the side impact der to limit the risk of head injuries. Operating fault
zone B, perpendicular to the longi- Each curtain airbag is fitted in the
tudinal centreline of the vehicle on pillars and the upper part of the pas- If this symbol appears in the
a horizontal plane and directed from senger compartment. instrument panel screen,
the outside towards the inside of the accompanied by an audible
vehicle. signal and a message, con-
The lateral airbag inflates between tact a CITROËN dealer or a quali-
the front occupant of the vehicle and fied workshop to have the system
the corresponding door trim panel. checked. The airbags may no longer
be deployed in the event of a seri-
ous impact.

* According to country.
126
 SAFETY

For the airbags to be fully

effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position. Front airbags Curtain airbags
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not drive holding the steering Do not fix or attach anything to the
Do not leave anything between the wheel by its spokes or resting your roof. This could cause injury to the
occupants and the airbags (a child, hands on the centre part of the head if the curtain airbag is de-
pet, object...). This could hamper the wheel. ployed.
operation of the airbags or injure the Passengers must not place their feet If fitted on your vehicle, do not re-
occupants. on the dashboard. move the grab handles installed on
After an accident or if the vehicle If possible, do not smoke as deploy- the roof, they play a part in securing
has been stolen or broken into, have ment of the airbags can cause burns the curtain airbags.
the airbag systems checked. or the risk of injury from a cigarette
All work on the airbag system must or pipe.
be carried out by a CITROËN dealer Never remove or pierce the steering
or a qualified workshop. wheel or hit it violently.
Even if all of the precautions men-
tioned are observed, a risk of injury
or of minor burns to the head, chest
or arms when an airbag is deployed
cannot be ruled out. The bag in- Lateral airbags
flates almost instantly (within a few Use only approved covers on the VIII
milliseconds) then deflates within the seats, compatible with the deployment
same time discharging the hot gas the lateral airbags. For information
via openings provided for this pur- on the range of seat covers suitable
pose. for your vehicle, you can contact a
CITROËN dealer (see "Practical infor-
mation - § Accessories").
Do not fix or attach anything to the
seat backs (clothing...). This could
cause injury to the chest or arms if
the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the
body any nearer to the door than
necessary.

127
 DRIVING

MANUAL PARKING BRAKE Release

) Press on the end of the lever
whilst pulling it then lower it fully.

This warning lamp comes

on if the parking brake is en-
gaged or not fully released.

If the parking brake is released,

the illumination of this warning lamp
along with the STOP warning lamp
indicates that the brake fluid level
is low or a fault with the brake force
distributor.
You must stop as soon as it is safe
Mechanical device for immobilising to do so.
the vehicle when stationary. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

Application
) Pull the parking brake lever up to
immobilise your vehicle.
To facilitate the action on the lever,
IX you are recommended to press the
brake pedal at the same time.

! In all circumstances, as a pre-

cautionary measure, engage
first gear.
On steep gradients, turn the steering
wheel towards the pavement.

128
 DRIVING

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE Automatic operation

Application with the engine off Application with the engine running
With the vehicle stationary, the park- With the engine running and the ve-
ing brake is automatically applied hicle stationary, in order to immobi-
when the engine is switched off. lise the vehicle you need to manually
The application of the parking brake apply the parking brake by pulling
is confirmed by: on control lever A.
The application of the parking brake
- warning lamp P in the is confirmed by:
control lever A coming on,
- warning lamp P in the
- this warning lamp in the in- control lever A coming on,
strument panel coming on,
- this warning lamp in the in-
strument panel coming on,
- display of a message "hand-
brake on" in the instrument panel - display of a message "hand-
screen. brake on" in the instrument panel
The electric parking brake combines The noise of operation will confirm screen.
2 operating modes: to you the application/release of When the driver’s door is opened, a
your electric parking brake. beep is heard and a message dis-
- AUTOMATIC
Automatic application when the played if the parking brake has not
engine stops and automatic re- been applied.
lease on use of the accelerator
(automatic operation by default), IX
- MANUAL Before leaving the vehicle, Before leaving the vehicle,
Manual application/release of the ! check that warning lamp P ! check that warning lamp P
parking brake is always possible and the warning lamp in the and the warning lamp in the
by pulling control lever A while instrument panel are on fixed (not instrument panel are on fixed (not
pressing the brake pedal. flashing). flashing).
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.

129
 DRIVING

Release Activation/Deactivation of the Manual operation

The electric parking brake releases automatic functions
automatically and progressively Depending on the country of sale, Manual application/release of the
when you press the accelerator: automatic application when switch- parking brake is always possible.
) with a manual gearbox (first ing off the engine and automatic
gear or reverse gear engaged), release when moving off can be de-
press down fully on the clutch activated. The activation/deactiva-
pedal then press on the accel- tion is done in the instrument panel
erator pedal and move off. screen configuration menu. Select
"Vehicle parameters/Comfort/Auto
) with an automatic gearbox, ac- handbrake".
celerate with the selector in posi-
tion D, M or R.
Deactivation of these func-
tions is signalled by this
warning lamp in the instru-
ment panel.
With the automatic functions deac-
Full release of the parking brake is tivated, the parking brake must be Application
confirmed by: applied and released manually. With the vehicle stationary, to apply the
- warning lamp P in the parking brake whether the engine is
control lever A going off, running or off, pull on control lever A.
The application of the parking brake
- this warning lamp in the is confirmed by:
instrument panel going off,
IX ! In some special circumstances,
with the engine not running, - warning lamp P in the
- display of a message "hand- (towing, icy conditions...) the au- control lever A coming on,
brake off" in the instrument panel tomatic parking brake can be re-
screen. leased manually, with the key in - this warning lamp in the in-
When stationary, with the engine the running position. strument panel coming on,
running, do not press the accelera- - display of a message "hand-
tor pedal unnecessarily (particularly brake on" in the instrument panel
when starting the engine, including screen.
in neutral), as you may release the
parking brake. If the configuration menu does not
have the option to activate/deacti- When the driver’s door is opened
Do nat place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone...) between the
vate the automatic functions, this
can be done by a CITROËN dealer
!with the engine running, a mes-
gear lever and the electric parking sage is displayed accompanied
or a qualified workshop. by an audible signal if the parking
brake control.
brake has not been applied.
130
 DRIVING

Release Maximum application Particular situations

With the ignition on or the engine
running, to release the parking If necessary, you can utilise maxi- In certain situations (starting the en-
brake, press on the brake pedal, mum application of the parking gine...), the parking brake can auto-
push then release control lever A. brake. It is obtained by means of a matically alter its level of application.
long pull on control lever A, until This is normal operation.
you see the message "Max applica- To advance your vehicle a few
tion of the handbrake" and a beep centimetres without starting the en-
The full application of the parking is heard.
brake is confirmed by: gine, but with the ignition on, press
Maximum application is essential: on the brake pedal and release the
- warning lamp P in the - in the case of a vehicle towing parking brake by pushing then
control lever A going off, a caravan or a trailer, if the au- releasing control lever A.
tomatic functions are activated The full release of the parking brake
- this warning lamp in the but you are applying the parking is confirmed by the warning lamp P
instrument panel going off, brake manually, in the control lever and the warning
- when the gradient you are parked lamp in the instrument panel going
- display of a message "parking on is variable in its effect (e.g. on off and the display of a message
brake released" in the instru- a ferry, in a lorry, during towing). "handbrake off" on the instrument
ment panel screen. panel screen.
- in the case of towing, a loaded
If you push control lever A without vehicle or parking on a gradient, If the parking brake malfunctions
pressing the brake pedal, the park- turn the front wheels towards the while applied or if the battery is flat,
ing brake will not be released and pavement and engage a gear an emergency release is still pos-
the message "Apply foot on brake" when you park. sible.
will be displayed on the instrument To ensure correct operation of the
panel. - after a maximum application, the
release time will be longer. parking brake and therefore your
safety, the number of successive IX
When stationary, with the en- application/release operations is
! gine running, do not press the limited to eight.
accelerator pedal unneces- If this number is exceeded, you are
sarily, as you may release the warned by the message "Parking
parking brake. brake faulty" and a warning lamp
flashes.

131
 DRIVING

Dynamic emergency braking If a failure of the ESP system Emergency parking brake
is signalled by the lighting release
of this warning lamp, then
braking stability is not guar-
anteed. In this event, stability must
be assured by the driver by repeat-
ing alternate "pull release" actions on
control lever A.

! The dynamic emergency

braking should only be used
in exceptional circumstances.

In the event of the electric parking

In the event of a failure of the ve- brake failing to release, an emergency
hicle’s main braking system or in device can be used to release the
an exceptional situation (e.g. driver parking brake manually, provided that
taken ill, under instruction, etc) pull ! If the vehicle cannot be im-
mobilised, do not operate it is possible to immobilise the vehicle
and hold control lever A to stop the the emergency release. Your ve- while the procedure is carried out.
vehicle. hicle may run away if on a slope. ) If you can start the vehicle: with
The electronic stability programme Contact a CITROËN dealer or a the engine running, immobilise
(ESP) provides stability during dy- qualified workshop. the vehicle by applying the foot
IX namic emergency braking. brake while the operation is being
If there is a fault with the dynamic carried out.
emergency braking, one of the fol- ) If you are unable to start the
lowing messages will be displayed vehicle (flat battery for example):
in the instrument panel screen: do not use this device and contact
- "Parking brake faulty". a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop. However, if you are
- "Parking brake control faulty". obliged to proceed, first immobilise
your vehicle securely and then fol-
low the instructions below.

132
 DRIVING

This strap does not permit

! application of the parking
brake.
To re-engage the electric parking
brake (after rectifying the malfunc-
tion or battery failure), give a long
pull on the control A until the park-
ing brake warning lamp (!) flashes
in the instrument panel then give a
second long pull until this warning
lamp is on fixed.
The time required for the subse-
quent application may be longer
than during normal operation.
) On sloping ground: immobilise ) Release the strap from its loca-
the vehicle by placing the chocks tion C. It is essential that the ignition is
(if your vehicle has them) in front not switched on until the parking
) Pull the strap to release the brake has re-engaged (flashing of
or behind the two front wheels, brake. A loud knock confirms the
against the slope the warning lamp (!) in the instru-
release of the brake. ment panel then the warning lamp
On level ground: immobilise the ) Take care to put the strap back in on fixed) to avoid damage to the
vehicle by placing the chocks its location C correctly. Otherwise, parking brake.
(if your vehicle has them) in it will no longer be possible to ap-
front and behind one of the front Take care not to allow moisture or
ply the brake. Contact a CITROËN dust in the proximity of the diagnos-
wheels. dealer or a qualified workshop. tic socket D which is essential for
) Open the lower compartment of ) Put the rubber mat back in place the maintenance of your vehicle.
the centre armrest by pulling it. on the base of the armrest. IX
) Ensure that the cup holder B is
folded away.
) Remove the rubber mat covering
the base of the armrest.

133
 DRIVING

Operating faults

! If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
Electric parking brake fault and display of If the electric parking brake fault warning lamp and the service
message "Parking brake faulty" and the warning lamp light up, position the vehicle in a safe location (on flat
following warning lamps: ground, with a gear engaged).

Display of the messages "Parking brake - The automatic functions are deactivated.
faulty" and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the - The hill start assist is not available.
following warning lamps:
- The electric parking brake is only available manually.
2

IX

Display of messages "Parking brake faulty" - Manual release of the electric parking brake is not available.
and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the following - The hill start assist is not available.
warning lamp:
- The automatic functions and manual application are still
available.
3

134
 DRIVING

SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
Display of messages "Parking brake faulty" - The automatic functions are deactivated.
and "Anti roll-back fault" and of the following - The hill start assist is not available.
warning lamps: To apply the electric parking brake:
) Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition
) Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum
application.
) Switch on the ignition and check that the electric parking brake
warning lamps are on.
4 - Application may take longer than in normal operation.
- If warning lamp (!) flashes or if the warning lamps do not come
on when the ignition is switched on, this method does not work.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
and/or flashing
To release the electric parking brake:
) Switch on the ignition.
) Push the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.

Display of message "Parking brake control - Only the functions for automatic application on switching off the
faulty – automatic mode activated" and the engine and automatic release on acceleration are available.
following warning lamps: - Manual application/release of the electric parking brake and dynamic
5 emergency braking are unavailable.

and/or flashing
IX
Display of message "Parking brake faulty" - Application of the parking brake is not guaranteed.
and of the following warning lamp: - The parking brake is temporarily unavailable.
It this situation arises:
6 ) Wait approximately 3 minutes.
) After 3 minutes, if the warning lamp is still flashing, try to
flashing reinitialise the parking brake, either by pushing and releasing
the control A while pressing the brake pedal or by means of a
long pull on control lever A.
Battery fault - Illumination of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop the
vehicle as soon as traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle.
7
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
135
 DRIVING

HILL START ASSIST Operation

System which keeps your vehicle

immobilised temporarily (approxi-
mately 2 seconds) when starting on
a gradient, the time to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the ac-
celerator pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary,
with your foot on the brake pedal,
- in certain conditions on a gradient,
- with the driver’s door closed. On an ascending gradient, with On a descending gradient, with the
The hill start assist function cannot the vehicle stationary, the vehicle vehicle stationary and reverse gear
be deactivated. is held for a brief moment when engaged, the vehicle is held for a
you release the brake pedal: brief moment when you release the
- provided you are in first gear or brake pedal.
neutral on a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in D or M on an
automatic gearbox.

IX ! Do not exit the vehicle while

it is being held in the hill start
assist phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle with
the engine running, apply the park-
ing brake manually and ensure that
the parking brake warning lamp (in
the instrument panel) is on fixed
(not flashing).

136
 DRIVING

5-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX 6-SPEED MANUAL

GEARBOX

Starting the vehicle Engaging reverse gear Engaging reverse gear

) Check that the gear lever is in ) Push the gear lever to the right ) Raise the ring under the knob
neutral. then rearwards. (indicated by the arrow) and
) Do not touch the accelerator. Only engage reverse gear when the push the gear lever to the left
vehicle is stationary with the engine then forwards.
) For Diesel engines: turn the
key to position M and wait until at idle. Only engage reverse gear when the
the pre-heating warning lamp vehicle is stationary with the engine
switches off if it has come on. at idle. IX
) Operate the starter, turning the
key until the engine starts (no
more than ten seconds).
) In temperatures lower than 0°C,
declutch while operating the
starter to facilitate starting. As a safety precaution and to facili-
tate starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.

137
 DRIVING

GEAR EFFICIENCY Example: The information appears in the in-

INDICATOR* - You are in third gear. strument panel screen in the form of
an arrow accompanied by the sug-
System which reduces fuel con- gested gear.
sumption by advising the driver to
change up on vehicles fitted with a
manual gearbox.

In the case of driving which

Operation
! makes particular demands on
- You press the accelerator pedal the performance of the engine
moderately. (firm pressure on the accelerator
The system intervenes only when pedal, for example, when overtak-
driving economically. ing...), the system will not recom-
Depending on the driving situation mend a gear change.
and your vehicle's equipment, the The system never suggests:
system may advise you to skip one
or more gears. You can follow this - engaging first gear,
instruction without engaging the in- - engaging reverse gear,
termediate gears. - engaging a lower gear.
The gear engagement recommen-
dations must not be considered
compulsory. In fact, the configu- - The system may suggest that
ration of the road, the amount of you engage a higher gear, if ap-
traffic and safety remain determin- propriate.
IX ing factors when choosing the best
gear. Therefore, the driver remains
responsible for deciding whether or
not to follow the advice given by the
system.
This function cannot be deactivated.

* According to engine.
138
 DRIVING

6-SPEED ELECTRONIC Mode selection Steering mounted control paddles

GEARBOX SYSTEM
Six-speed electronic gearbox system
which offers a choice between the
comfort of fully automatic operation or
the pleasure of manual gear changing.
There are two driving modes:
- automatic operation for elec-
tronic control of the gears by the
gearbox,
- manual operation for sequential
gear changing by the driver,
In automated mode, it remains possi-
ble to change gear manually by using
the steering mounted control paddles,
when overtaking, for example.
A SPORT programme is available in ) automatic mode: gear lever in +. Change up paddle to the right of
automated mode, providing a more position A, the steering wheel.
dynamic driving style.
) sequential mode: gear lever in ) Press the back of the "+" steering
position M, mounted paddle to change up a
) SPORT mode: gear lever in po- gear.
sition A and a press on button 1. -. Change down paddle to the left of
the steering wheel.
) Press the back of the "-" steering IX
mounted paddle to change down
a gear.

The steering mounted paddles

cannot be used to select neutral
or to engage or disengage reverse
gear.

139
 DRIVING

Displays in the instrument panel Moving off Reverse

) To start the engine, the gear lever ) With your foot on the brake, push
must be in position N. the lever forwards.
) Press the brake pedal down fully.
) Operate the starter Only engage reverse with
N appears in the instrument panel the vehicle immobilised.
screen. To avoid any jerking, wait a
moment before accelerating.
The position of the gear lever the the
driving mode are displayed in dial C
of the instrument panel.
A selection grille alongside the gear
lever also allows you to see the se-
lected position. N flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the multifunction
screen, if the gear lever is not in Neutral
position N on starting.
Never select position N with
the vehicle moving.

) Select first gear (position M or A)

or reverse (position R).
IX ) Release the parking brake unless
it is programmed in automatic
mode.
) Release the brake pedal, then
accelerate.

140
 DRIVING

Automatic operation Manual gear changing The gear change requests are only
carried out if the engine speed
This selective gear change mode en- permits.
ables you to overtake, for example, It is not necessary to release the ac-
while still remaining in automatic celerator during gear changes.
mode.
When braking or slowing down, the
) Operate the + or - steering mounted gearbox changes down automati-
control paddle. cally to allow vehicle to accelerate in
The gearbox engages the gear re- the correct gear.
quested if the engine speed permits. The SPORT programme is inopera-
After a few moments without any tive with sequential operation.
action on the controls, the gearbox
resumes automatic control of the
gears.

Manual operation On sharp acceleration, the gearbox

) Select position A. will not change up unless the driver
The gearbox continuously selects acts on the gear lever or the steer-
the most suitable gear, depending ing mounted paddles.
on the: Never select neutral N while the
- style of driving, vehicle is moving.
- profile of the road, Only engage reverse gear R when
- vehicle loading. the vehicle is immobilised with the IX
brake pedal pressed.

For optimum acceleration, for example

when overtaking another vehicle, press
the accelerator pedal firmly past the
point of resistance.

) Select position M.

141
 DRIVING

SPORT programme Stopping the vehicle Operating fault

Before switching off the engine, you With the ignition on, the flashing of
can choose to: AUTO, accompanied by an audible
- move to position N to engage signal and a message in the mul-
neutral, tifunction screen, indicates a fault
with the gearbox.
- leave the gear engaged; in this
case, it will not be possible to Have it checked by a CITROËN
move the vehicle. dealer or a qualified workshop.
In both cases, you must apply the
parking brake to immobilise the You must press the brake pedal
vehicle. when starting the engine.
Whatever the circumstances, you
must manually apply the parking
brake when parking, unless the park-
ing brake is programmed in auto-
matic mode.
) Wit the gear lever at A and the
engine running, press button S to When immobilising the ve-
activate the SPORT programme,
which provides a more dynamic
! hicle, with the engine running,
you must place the gear lever
driving style. in neutral N.
S appears in the instrument panel. Before carrying out any work in the
IX engine compartment, check that
the gear lever is in neutral N and
) Press the S button again to switch that the parking brake is applied.
it off.
S then disappears from the instru-
ment panel screen.

142
 DRIVING

STOP & START If your vehicle is fitted Special cases: STOP mode not
with the system, a time available
The Stop & Start system puts the en- counter calculates the STOP mode is not invoked when:
gine temporarily into standby - STOP sum of the periods in
mode - during stops in the traffic STOP mode during a journey. It rests - the driver's door is open,
(red lights, traffic jams, or other...). itself to zero every time the ignition - the driver's seat belt is not fas-
The engine restarts automatically - is switched on with the key. tened,
START mode - as soon as you want - the vehicle has not exceeded
to move off. The restart takes place 6 mph (10 km/h) since the last
instantly, quickly and silently. engine start using the key,
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & - the electric parking brake is ap-
Start system reduces fuel consump- For your comfort, during parking plied or being applied,
tion and exhaust emissions as well maoeuvres, STOP mode is not
available for a few seconds after - the engine is needed to maintain
as the noise level when stationary. a comfortable temperature in the
coming out of reverse gear.
passenger compartment,
STOP mode does not affect the func-
tionality of the vehicle, such as for ex- - demisting is active,
ample, braking, power steering... - some special conditions (battery
charge, engine temperature,
Operation braking assistance, ambient
temperature...) where the engine
Going into engine STOP mode is needed to assure control of a
system.

The "ECO" warning lamp comes

on in the instrument panel and ! Never refuel with the engine in
STOP mode; you must switch In this case, the "ECO"
the engine goes into standby: off the ignition with the key. warning lamp flashes for a IX
few seconds then goes off.
- with the electronic gearbox
system, at speeds below 4 mph
(6 km/h), press the brake pedal or This operation is perfectly normal.
put the gear lever in position N.

143
 DRIVING

Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked Deactivation
automatically
The "ECO" warning lamp goes START mode is invoked automati-
off and the engine starts with the cally when:
electronic gearbox system: - the driver's door is open,
● gear lever in position A or M, re- - the driver's seat belt is not fas-
lease the brake pedal, tened,
● or gear lever in position N and the - the speed of the vehicle exceeds
brake pedal released, move the 7 mph (11 km/h) with the elec-
gear lever to position A or M, tronic gearbox system,
● or engage reverse gear. - the electric parking brake is being
applied,
- some special conditions (battery
charge, engine temperature, At any time, press the "ECO OFF"
braking assistance, ambient tem- switch to deactivate the system.
perature...) where the engine is
needed for control of a system. This is confirmed by the switch warn-
ing lamp coming on accompanied by
a message in the screen.

If the system has been deactivated

In this case the "ECO" in STOP mode, the engine restarts
warning lamp flashes for a immediately.
IX few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal. Reactivation

Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is
confirmed by the switch warning
lamp going off and a message in the
screen.

The system is reactivated auto-

matically at every new start using
the key.
144
 DRIVING

Operating fault Maintenance

Before doing anything under

! the bonnet, deactivate the
Stop & Start system to avoid
any risk of injury resulting from au-
tomatic operation of START mode.

This system requires a battery with

a special specification and techno-
logy (reference numbers available
from CITROËN dealers).
Fitting a battery not listed by
In the event of a fault with the sys- CITROËN introduces the risk of
tem, the "ECO OFF" switch warning malfunction of the system.
lamp flashes then comes on con-
tinuously.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode,
the vehicle may stall. It is then neces-
sary to switch off the ignition and start
the engine again using the key.
IX
! The Stop & Start system
makes use of advanced tech-
nology. For any work on the sys-
tem go to a qualified workshop with
the skills and equipment required,
which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide.

145
 DRIVING

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX Mode selection Displays in the instrument panel

The position of the gear lever and

the driving mode are displayed in
the instrument panel dial C.
A position grille associated with the
gear lever allows you to view the se-
lected position.

Automatic gearbox which offers a ) automatic mode: gear lever in

choice between the comfort of fully position D,
For safety:
automatic operation, enhanced by
the sport and snow programmes, or
) sequential mode: gear lever in
position M,
! - position P can be disen-
manual gear changing. gaged only if you press
) SPORT mode: gear lever in po- the brake pedal,
Four driving modes are provided: sition D and button A pressed,
- automatic operation for elec- - when a door is opened, an au-
IX tronic control of the gears by the
) SNOW mode: gear lever in posi-
tion D and button B pressed.
dible signal is heard if the gear
gearbox, lever is not in position P,
- the SPORT programme for a - always make sure that the gear
more dynamic driving style, lever is in position P before you
leave your vehicle.
- the SNOW programme to improve
driving when the grip is poor, If the gearbox is in position P but
the position of the gear lever is dif-
- manual operation for sequential ferent, reposition the gear lever
changing of the gears by the driver. on P so that you can start the ve-
hicle.

146
 DRIVING

Moving off Park Reverse gear

) To start the engine, the gear lever This position of the gear le- Only engage this position
must be in position P or N. ver is used to prevent the when the vehicle is station-
) Operate the starter. vehicle from moving when ary. To prevent snatching,
you are stationary. do not accelerate too soon
) When the engine is running, after selection.
place the gear lever on R, D ) To select position P, move the
or M as required. gear lever back to the highest
position (towards R), then push
) Check, in the instrument panel, it forwards and then to the left.
the position engaged. Neutral
) To exit position P, move the gear
) Release the brake pedal and ac- lever to the right and then to the
celerate. position you want. Never select position N if
) To avoid a possible difference the vehicle is moving.
) Only engage this position when
between the position of the gear the vehicle is completely sta-
lever and the actual position of tionary. In this position, the front
the gearbox, always exit from wheels are locked. Make sure
position P with the ignition on that the gear lever is correctly
and brake pedal applied. positioned.
Never select positions P or R
Otherwise, when the ignition is on or
the engine is running: ! if the vehicle is not stationary.
) reposition the gear lever in posi- If, while the vehicle is moving, po-
tion P, sition N is engaged inadvertently,
allow the engine to idle before en-
) put your foot on the brake pedal gaging position D or M.
and then select the gear you want. IX

147
 DRIVING

Automatic operation When braking, the gearbox may - If the vehicle stops or reduces
change down automatically in order speed (for example when ap-
to provide effective engine braking. proaching a stop sign), the gear-
If you lift your foot off the accelerator box changes down automatically
abruptly, the gearbox will not engage to first gear.
a higher gear. - In sequential mode, it is not nec-
essary to release the accelerator
during gear changes.
- A request to change gear is ac-
cepted only if the engine speed
permits it.
Manual operation
- The SPORT and SNOW modes
do not operate in sequential
mode.

) Move the gear lever to position D.

The gearbox constantly selects
the gear that is best suited to the
following parameters:
- driving style,
- road profile
IX - vehicle load.
The gearbox operates without requiring
any intervention on your part.
For certain manoeuvres (for ex- Position of the gear lever for manual
ample overtaking), you can obtain gear changing.
maximum acceleration by pressing ) Move the gear lever to position M.
the accelerator pedal hard down
past the point of resistance, which ) Push the gear lever towards the
then produces an automatic change "+" sign to change up a gear.
down to a lower gear. ) Pull the gear lever towards the "-"
sign to change down a gear.

148
 DRIVING

SPORT and SNOW SNOW programme "7"

A strong snatch may be felt
programmes ) With the gear lever in position D
and the engine running, press
! when selecting R for reverse
gear.
button B.
In the event of a fault, the gearbox is
The gearbox adapts to driving on blocked in one gear; do not exceed
slippery roads. a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h).
This programme makes moving off Do not turn off the engine while the
easier and improves traction in con- gear selector is in position D or R.
ditions of poor grip.
Never press the accelerator and
brake pedals simultaneously. Braking
7 appears in the instrument and acceleration should be done with
panel. the right foot only. Pressing both ped-
als simultaneously may damage the
gearbox.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Return to automatic operation
These two special programmes sup- ) At any time, press the button se-
plement the automatic operation in lected again to exit from the pro-
very particular conditions of use. gramme engaged and return to
auto-adaptive mode.

SPORT programme "S" IX

) With the gear lever in po-
sition D and the engine
running, press button A.

The gearbox automatically favours a

dynamic driving style.
S appears in the instrument panel.

149
 DRIVING

FIXED CENTRED CONTROLS STEERING WHEEL

- Scroll the various pages of information on the instrument panel screen.

Rotation - Move through the various menus on the instrument panel screen.
- Increase/decrease values.
1
- Open the menu on the instrument panel screen (only when stationary).
Short press - Select and confirm information.
Long press Trip computer zero reset (if the trip computer page is displayed).
- Cancel the current operation.
Short press
2 - Return to the previous screen on the instrument panel screen.
Long press Return to the initial page on the instrument panel screen.
Short press Increase the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h)/storing the speed.
3
Maintained press Increase the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
Short press Decrease the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h)/storing the speed.
4
Maintained press Decrease the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
Suspend or resume cruise control/speed limiter (depending
5 Short press on the mode selected).
Select cruise control or speed limiter mode (the cycle on this
6 Short press button will always begin with selection of the speed limiter).
IX 7 Short press Deactivate cruise control/speed limiter.
- Pick up an incoming call.
- Hang up the current call.
Short press
8 - Open the telephone short-cut menu.
- Confirm on the list and the telephone menu.
Long press Refuse an incoming call.
9 Short press/Long press Horn.
10 Short press Activate/deactivate Black Panel mode (night driving).
Short press Activate the voice command.
11
Long press Navigation instruction repeat.

150
 DRIVING

- Radio source: Scroll the pre-set stations.

- CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Scroll the
Rotation CDs or directories.
- On the multifunction screen menus: Movement and
increase/decrease.
12
- On the multifunction screen menus: confirm.
Short press - Open the short-cut menus (depending on the multifunction
screen page).
Long press Open the multifunction screen main menu.
Cancel the current operation and return to the previous page on
Short press the multifunction screen.
13 When an incoming telephone call is received: Refuse the call.
Long press Return to the initial page on the multifunction screen.
14 Short press Access to the multifunction screen general menu.
15 Short press/Maintained press Volume increase.
16 Short press/Maintained press Volume decrease.
- First press: mute.
17 Short press - Second press: restore sound.
- Radio source: Automatic search of higher frequencies.
Short press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for the next track.
18
Maintained press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast forward play.
IX
- Radio source: Automatic search of lower frequencies.
Short press - CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Search for
19 the previous track.
Maintained press CD/MP3 CD/CD changer/jukebox source: Fast backwards.
- Radio source: display the list of radio stations available.
- CD/MP3 CD and CD changer source: display the list of
Short press
20 CD tracks and directories.
- Jukebox source: display the list of albums.
Long press Update the list of radio stations.
21 Short press/Long press Horn.
22 Short press MODE: selection of the type of information presented on the multifunction screen.
151
 DRIVING

SPEED LIMITER Displays in the instrument panel

System which prevents the vehi-
cle from exceeding the speed pro-
grammed by the driver.
When the limit speed is reached, the
accelerator pedal no longer has any
effect.
The speed limiter is switched on
manually: a speed of at least 20 mph
(approx. 30 km/h) must be pro- The speed limiter information is dis- Successive presses will modify the
grammed. played in zone A of the instrument maximum speed in steps of 1 mph
The speed limiter can in no way re- panel. and a continuous press in steps of
place respect for speed limits or vigi- 5 mph.
lance and responsibility on the part
of the driver. Programming
) Press on button 4 to select speed Activation
limiter mode "LIMIT".
Steering mounted controls The selection is confirmed by the
display of the function in zone A of
the instrument panel.
) Press on button 3 when the de-
sired maximum speed is dis-
played.
IX The information "ON" then appears
in zone A.
When the function is selected, the
last memorised speed and the infor-
mation "PAUSE" are displayed.
With the engine running, you can ad-
just the memorised maximum speed,
displayed in zone A, by pressing on:
The speed limiter switches are lo- ) Button 1 to increase the memo-
cated on the left-hand side of the rised maximum speed.
steering wheel.
) Button 2 to decrease the memo-
rised maximum speed.

152
 DRIVING

Return to normal driving

) Either press on button 5.
) Or select the speed limiter func-
tion.
Overriding the programmed ) Or stop the engine.
speed
The accelerator pedal has an end-
of-travel switch. In order to exceed
the memorised maximum speed at Operating fault
any time, you can press the pedal
all the way down. While the speed If there is a fault, a message is
Suspension/Resumption is being exceeded, the speed dis- displayed accompanied by an au-
played in zone A will flash. You have dible signal and illumination of the
) Press on button 3. only to release the accelerator pedal SERVICE warning lamp.
This action causes the information to return below the maximum speed, Have it checked by a CITROËN
"PAUSE" to appear in zone A of the to restore the function. dealer or a qualified workshop.
instrument panel. The speed will also flash if the speed
limiter is not able to prevent the vehi-
cle from exceeding the programmed
speed (e.g. on a steep descent or
under excessive acceleration).
To reactivate the speed limiter, re- In the event of a steep descent or
This action does not cancel the lease the accelerator to slow to a under excessive acceleration, the
memorised maximum speed which speed lower than the programmed speed limiter (which does not act
remains displayed in zone A of the speed. on the brakes) may not be able to
IX
instrument panel. prevent the vehicle from exceeding
the programmed speed.
Use of a floor mat other than that
recommended by CITROËN may
affect the normal operation of the
accelerator pedal and hamper the
operation of the speed limiter.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
are fitted with a 3rd fixing located in
the pedal area to avoid any risk of
interference with the pedals.

153
 DRIVING

CRUISE CONTROL Displays in the instrument Once the desired speed has been
panel reached using the accelerator, press
System which automatically main- button 1 or button 2. The cruising
tains the vehicle speed programmed speed is then memorised and cruise
by the driver, without any action on control is activated. The cruising
the accelerator pedal. speed is displayed in zone A of the
The cruise control is switched on instrument panel, and "ON" is dis-
manually: the vehicle speed must be played.
at least 25 mph (40 km/h) and you
must be in at least:
- 4th gear for manual gearboxes,
- 2nd gear for automatic gearboxes. The programmed information is
grouped together in zone A of the
instrument panel. You can then release the accelera-
tor pedal. The vehicle will automati-
cally keep to the speed chosen.
The vehicle speed may vary slightly
Programming from that memorised.
) Press button 4 to select cruise If during cruise control the system
Steering mounted controls cannot keep to the cruise speed
control mode "CRUISE".
(e.g. on a steep descent), then the
speed flashes. If necessary, brake to
curb your speed.

IX Adjustment of the memorised

The selection is confirmed by the speed while cruise control is
display of the function in zone A of in operation
the instrument panel.
You can adjust the memorised speed,
When the function is selected, no displayed in zone A, by pressing:
cruising speed has yet been
memorised. - Button 1 to increase the speed.
The cruise control switches are lo- - Button 2 to reduce the speed.
cated on the left-hand side of the Successive presses will modify the
steering wheel. cruise speed in steps of 1 mph and a
continuous press in steps of 5 mph.

154
 DRIVING

Overriding the programmed Reactivation Operating fault

speed
- By recalling the memorised If there is a fault, a message is
While cruise control is in operation, it is speed displayed accompanied by an au-
always possible to go above the pro- After deactivation, press button 3. dible signal and illumination of the
grammed speed simply by pressing Your vehicle automatically returns SERVICE warning lamp.
the accelerator pedal (for example to to the memorised cruising speed. Have it checked by a CITROËN
overtake another vehicle). The memorised speed and "ON" dealer or a qualified workshop.
The speed displayed in zone A are displayed in zone A.
flashes. If the memorised cruising speed
You only have to release the is higher than the current speed,
accelerator pedal to return to the the vehicle will accelerate strongly
programmed speed. to reach the current speed.
- By selecting the current speed
Cruise control must only be
Suspension/Resumption
Press button 1 or 2 once the de-
sired speed has been reached. ! used where the traffic condi-
The new speed and "ON" will tions permit driving at a con-
) Either by pressing the brake appear in zone A. stant speed.
pedal or the clutch pedal. Do not use it on congested roads
) Or by pressing button 3. or when the weather or the road
) Or by the ESP or ASR systems conditions are poor.
being active. The driver must remain attentive
For vehicles with a manual gearbox, and in complete control of the ve-
cruise control is deactivated if the hicle.
gear lever is in neutral. You are recommended to keep your
feet within range of the pedals. IX
Return to normal driving
) Either press on button 5.
) Or select the cruise control func-
tion.
"PAUSE" will be displayed in zone A ) Or stop the engine.
of the instrument panel.
The speed that was chosen is no
These actions do not cancel the longer memorised.
cruising speed which remains dis-
played on the instrument panel.

155
 DRIVING

LANE DEPARTURE
WARNING SYSTEM
System which detects the involun-
tary crossing of longitudinal traffic
lane markings on the ground (solid
or broken line).
Sensors, fitted below the front
bumper, trigger a warning if the vehi-
cle drifts over a lane marking (speed
higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).

This system is particularly useful on

motorways and main roads.

The lane departure warning sys-

tem cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the Detection Operating fault
driver. You are warned by the vibration of In the event of a malfunction, the
the driver’s seat cushion: service warning lamp comes on, ac-
IX companied by an audible signal and
- on the right-hand side, if the
marking on the ground has been a message in the screen.
Activation crossed on the right, Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
) Press this button, the indicator - on the left-hand side, if the mark- qualified workshop.
lamp comes on. ing on the ground has been
crossed on the left. The detection may be impeded:
No warning is transmitted while the - if the sensors are dirty (mud,
Deactivation direction indicator is active and for snow...),
approximately 20 seconds after the - if the markings on the ground
) Press this button again, the indi- direction indicator is switched off. are worn,
cator lamp goes off. A warning may be transmitted if a direc- - if there is little contrast between
The status of the system remains tion marking (e.g. arrow) or non-standard the markings on the ground and
in the memory when the ignition is marking (e.g. graffiti) is crossed. the road surface.
switched off.
156
 DRIVING

PARKING SPACE SENSOR

System which measures the parking Displays in the instrument panel You can select the "parking space
space available between two vehi- sensor" function by pressing but-
cles or obstacles. It measures the The parking space sensor function ton A. The fixed illumination of the
size of the space and gives you in- warning lamp can have three different warning lamp indicates that the
formation on: states: function is selected.
- the possibility of fitting into a - off: the function is not selected, During the measurement, the mes-
free space, depending on the - on fixed: the function is selected sage "Measurement in progress -
dimensions of your vehicle and but the conditions for measuring Vmax 20 km/h (12 mph)" is displayed
the distances necessary for your are not yet met (direction indi- in the instrument panel screen.
manoeuvring, cator not operating, speed too
IX
- the level of difficulty of the ma- high) or the measurement is ter-
noeuvre to be performed. minated.
The system does not measure spac- - flashing: measurement is in
es which are clearly much smaller or progress or the message is be-
larger than the size of the vehicle. ing displayed.

157
 DRIVING

Operation The function displays the following The function deselects itself auto-
types of message: matically:
You have identified a parking space: - when you engage reverse gear,
) Press button A to select the function. - when you switch off the ignition,
) Activate the direction indicator - if measurement is not requested,
on the side where the space is to
be measured. - within five minutes of selection of
the function,
) During measurement, go forward
the length of the space, at a speed - if the vehicle speed exceeds the
less than 12 mph (approx. 20 km/h), threshold of 45 mph (approx.
Parking YES 70 km/h) for one minute.
to prepare for your manoeuvre.
If the lateral distance between your
vehicle and the parking space is too
large, the system may not be able to
measure the space.
The function remains available af-
The system then measures the size ter each measurement and thus can
of the space. measure more than one space during
your search.
Parking DIFFICULT In bad weather conditions or in
winter, make sure that the sensors
are not covered by dirt, or by ice or
snow.
The parking space sensor function
deactivates the front parking sensors
IX during space measurement when
) The system informs you of the level of you are in forward gear.
difficulty of the manoeuvre via a mes-
sage in the instrument panel screen Parking NO
accompanied by an audible signal.
) Depending on the message issued
by the system, you may or may not
be able to perform the manoeuvre.

If there is a fault, have the system

checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.

158
 DRIVING

VISUAL AND AUDIBLE The parking sensors are switched on:

FRONT AND/OR REAR - by engaging reverse gear, The parking sensors system cannot,
PARKING SENSORS - at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in any circumstances, replace the
in forward gear. need for vigilance and responsibility
System consisting of proximity sensors, on the part of the driver.
installed in the front and/or rear bumper. This is accompanied by an audible
signal and/or displaying of the vehi-
It detects any obstacle (person, ve- cle on the multifunction screen.
hicle, tree, barrier...) located in front of Deactivation
or behind the vehicle, however, it will The proximity information is indicated by: ) Press button A, the warning lamp
not be able to detect obstacles located - an audible signal which be- comes on, the system is fully de-
immediately below the bumper. comes more rapid as the vehicle activated.
An object, such as a stake, a road- approaches the obstacle, The system will be deactivated au-
works cone or any other similar ob- - a diagram on the multifunction tomatically when a trailer is being
ject may be detected at the start of display, with blocks which move towed or when a bicycle carrier is
the manoeuvre but may no longer closer to the vehicle. fitted (vehicle fitted with a towbar
be detected when the vehicle moves The obstacle is located in relation to or bicycle carrier recommended by
nearer to it. the emission of the audible signal by CITROËN).
the speakers; front or rear and right
or left.
When the distance between the ve-
hicle and the obstacle is less than
approximately thirty centimetres,
the audible signal becomes con-
tinuous and/or the "Danger" symbol
appears, depending on the multi-
function screen version. IX

The parking sensors are switched off:

- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than
6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been station-
ary for more than three seconds in
forward gear.

159
 DRIVING

Reactivation "HYDRACTIVE III +" Display in the instrument

ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION panel
The suspension mode selected is
displayed in the instrument panel
screen.
Normal mode

This mode favours soft

damping for maximum com-
fort.
If the speed authorised for a
particular position is exceeded,
the vehicle reverts automatically to the
normal road position.
) Press button A again, the warning
lamp switches off, the system is
reactivated. The suspension automatically and
instantly adjusts to different driving
styles and to the profile of the road, SPORT mode
providing the best compromise be-
tween occupant comfort and vehicle This mode favours dynamic
In bad weather or in winter, ensure road holding. driving.
that the sensors are not covered The system alternates between soft
with mud, ice or snow. When re- The warning lamp on button A
IX and firm suspension settings, maxi- comes on in addition to the
verse gear is engaged, an audible mising comfort at the same time as
signal (long beep) indicates that the message in the instrument
constantly ensuring the highest level panel screen.
sensors may be dirty. of safety. It also automatically cor-
When the speed of the vehicle is SPORT mode is retained when you
rects ride height, according to the switch off the engine.
below about 6 mph (10 km/h), some vehicle load and driving conditions.
sources of noise (motorcycle, lorry, In addition, the "Hydractive III +" sys-
pneumatic drill, ...) may trigger the tem allows you to choose between
audible parking sensor signals. two modes of suspension.
A change of suspension mode can
be made either when the vehicle is
moving or when stationary, by press-
ing button A.

160
 DRIVING

Vehicle positions

High position Normal position

Changing a wheel (not possible if If the speed authorised for a particu-
speed > 6mph (10km/h)). lar position is exceeded, the vehicle
reverts automatically to the normal
position.

Position changes may only be

made when the engine is running.
The adjustable ground clearance
meets all types of situation. Apart
from a few specific situations, the
vehicle should be in the Normal
position.
) Press once on one of the adjust-
ment controls. IX
Mid-high position Low position
The change in position is indicated
by a message on the instrument For increased ground clearance (not To facilitate loading or unloading the
panel screen. possible if speed > 25 mph (40 km/h)). vehicle.
For use on difficult roads when trav- For workshop inspections.
elling at reduced speed, as well as Not to be used in normal driving (not
on car park ramps. possible if speed > 6mph (10km/h)).

161
 DRIVING

Request not granted Automatic variation of ground clear-

ance
- If your speed exceeds 70 mph For your safety if you are operating
(approx. 110 km/h), on a good underneath the vehicle, you must
road surface, ground clearance support the vehicle with axle stands.
is lowered. The vehicle returns
to its normal position if the road
surface deteriorates or if your
speed is lower than 55 mph (ap-
prox. 90 km/h).
- At low or medium speed, if the
road surface is poor, ground
The instrument panel screen tempo- clearance is increased. The ve-
rarily displays a message indicating hicle returns to its normal posi-
that this position is not authorised. tion as soon as conditions allow.
The vehicle remains in the autho- - On switching off the ignition, the
rised position and the instrument ground clearance is reduced to
panel screen indicates this position the parking position.
to you.

IX

162
 CHECKS

TOTAL & CITROËN

PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE
AND PROTECTING
THE ENVIRONMENT
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed
for CITROËN, lubricants to match the lat-
est technical innovations on CITROËN
vehicles, both for competition and for everyday
motoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will
obtain of the best performance for your
engine.
Optimum protection for your
engine
By having your CITROËN vehicle
serviced with TOTAL lubricants,
you are contributing towards
improving the life and perfor-
mances of your engine, while
also protecting the environment.

prefers

163
 CHECKS

BONNET
When the engine is hot, handle the
Opening safety catch and bonnet stay with
care (risk of burns).
The location of the interior release
Before doing anything under lever prevents opening of the bon-
! the bonnet, switch off the Stop & net while the left hand front door is
closed.
Start system to avoid any risk
of injury resulting from an automatic This operation must only be carried
change to START mode. out when the vehicle is stationary.
Avoid opening the bonnet in strong
winds.

) At the front of the bonnet, lift Closing

the safety catch B and raise the
bonnet. ) Take the stay out of the support
notch.
) Clip the stay in its housing.
) Lower the bonnet then slam it
firmly at the end of its travel.
) Pull on the bonnet to check that
it is fully closed.

) Open the left hand front door.

X ) Pull the interior bonnet release
lever A, located at the bottom of
the door frame.

) Unclip the stay C from its housing

and pivot it to insert it in the notch D
indicated by a yellow arrow.
) Fix the stay in the notch to hold
the bonnet open.

164
 CHECKS

BLEEDING THE DIESEL FUEL Refitting Bleeding water from the fuel
FILTER ) Firstly clip in at 2. filter
Protective cover ) Lower and centre the cover.
) Clip in at 3 and 4, pushing verti-
cally and gently from the rear.
) Clip in at 1 pushing vertically.

Bleed regularly (at each oil change).

To bleed the water, slacken the bleed
screw or the water in diesel fuel sen-
Removing the cover sor, located at the base of the filter.
Continue until all the water has
flowed out.
HDi 140 engine
Then tighten the bleed screw or the
) Remove the protective cover by water detection sensor.
first unclipping at 3, then 1 and 4.
) Unclip at 2 by pulling towards
you, then lift up.
X
HDi 110, HDi 160 and V6 HDi 240
engines
) Pull the protective cover upwards
to remove it.

165
 CHECKS

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If the engine fails to start at the first

(DIESEL) attempt, wait fifteen seconds before
trying again.
If the engine fails to start after a
few attempts, operate the priming
pump again and then try to start the
engine.
When the engine is idling, acceler-
ate slightly to complete the bleeding
of the circuit.

V6 HDi 240 engine with electric

pump
HDi 110 engine HDi 140 and HDi 160 engines In the event of running out of fuel:
) after adding fuel, turn the ignition
) Unclip the protective cover to gain ) Unclip the protective cover to gain key to position M, wait for a few
access to the priming pump. access to the priming pump. seconds,
) operate the starter motor until
the engine starts.
Priming the fuel system If the engine fails to start after se-
veral attempts, contact a CITROËN
In the event of running out of fuel: dealer or a qualified workshop.
) after filling (minimum 5 litres) and
removing the protective cover,
X operate the manual priming pump,
until some resistance is felt,
) operate the starter motor while
depressing the accelerator pedal HDi engines make use of
slightly until the engine starts. ! advanced technology.
For any work on your vehicle, con-
tact a qualified workshop that has
the skills and equipment required,
which a CITROËN dealer is able to
provide.

166
 CHECKS

PETROL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow
access for checking fluid levels and
for replacing certain components.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir or
power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Brake fluid reservoir.
7. Battery.
1.6i THP
8. Air filter.

1.6i VTi
167
 CHECKS

1. Screenwash and headlamp wash

reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir or
power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Brake fluid reservoir.
7. Battery.
8. Air filter.

2.0i 16V

Vehicles fitted with the 2.0i 16v

! engine may be fitted with metal
spring suspension. In this case,
a different power steering fluid reser-
voir is fitted.

168
 CHECKS

DIESEL ENGINES
The various caps and covers allow
access for checking fluid levels, for
replacing certain components and
for priming the fuel system.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir or
power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir, depending on
equipment.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
HDi 110/e-HDi 110
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
8. Battery.

X
As the Diesel fuel system
! operates under high pressure,
any work on the fuel system is
prohibited.
Vehicles fitted with the HDi 140
engine may be fitted with metal
spring suspension. In this case, a
different power steering fluid reser-
voir is fitted.
HDi 140
169
 CHECKS

HDi 160 - HDi 200 engines

(with particle emissions filter)

1. Screenwash and headlamp wash

reservoir.
2. Power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
8. Battery.

HDi 160

As the Diesel fuel system ope-

X ! rates under high pressure:
- All work on the fuel system is
prohibited.
- HDi engines make use of ad-
vanced technology.
All maintenance and repairs require
special qualifications which only a
CITROËN dealer can guarantee.

HDi 200
170
 CHECKS

V6 HDi 240 engine (with

particle emissions filter)

1. Screenwash and headlamp wash

reservoir.
2. Power steering and suspension
fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
8. "+" and "-" terminals for emergency
starting with a slave battery.

V6 HDi 240

As the Diesel fuel system ope-

! rates under high pressure: X
- All work on the fuel system is
prohibited.
- HDi engines make use of ad-
vanced technology.
All maintenance and repairs require
special qualifications which only a
CITROËN dealer can guarantee.

171
 CHECKS

CHECKING LEVELS Dipstick Brake fluid level

There are 2 marks on the
Check all of these levels regularly dipstick: The brake fluid level should
and top them up if necessary, unless be close to the "MAX" mark.
otherwise indicated. - A = max; never exceed
this level, If it is not, check the brake
If a level drops significantly, have pad wear.
the corresponding system checked - B = min; top up the level
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified via the oil filler cap, us-
workshop. ing the type of oil suited
to your engine. Fluid change
Refer to the servicing booklet for de-
tails of the interval for this operation.
Oil level
This fluid must be changed regu-
The reading will only be larly. Fluid which has been used for
correct if the vehicle is on too long may cause a loss of braking
level ground and the engine efficiency.
has been off for more than
30 minutes.
The check is carried out either when Fluid specification
the ignition is switched on using the The brake fluid must conform to the
oil level indicator in the instrument manufacturer's recommendations
panel, or using the dipstick. and meet the DOT4 standard.
Check this level also between each Oil change
scheduled service and before long Refer to the servicing booklet for de-
journeys. tails of the interval for this operation.
Take care when doing anything
under the bonnet, as some parts Power steering fluid or power
of the engine can be extremely hot
(risk of burns). steering and suspension
X In order to maintain the reliability fluid level
! of the engine and emission con-
This fluid must be topped up
trol system, the use of additives
in the engine oil is prohibited. by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

Oil specification
The oil must correspond to your
engine and conform to the manufac-
turer's recommendations.
172
 CHECKS

Coolant level Screenwash and headlamp Diesel additive level

wash fluid (Diesel engine with particle
emission filter)
The coolant level should be In the case of vehicles fitted
close to the "MAX" mark but with headlamp washers, the The additive reservoir
should never exceed it. minimum level of this fluid low level is indicated
When the engine is warm, is indicated by an audible by fixed illumination
the temperature of the coolant is signal and a message in the multi- of this warning lamp,
regulated by the fan. This can oper- function screen. accompanied by an audible warning
ate with the ignition off. Top up the level when you stop the and a message in the multifunction
On vehicles which are fitted with vehicle. screen.
a particle emission filter, the fan
may operate after the vehicle has Fluid specification Topping up
been switched off, even if the en- For optimum cleaning and to avoid This additive must be topped up by
gine is cold. freezing, this fluid must not be topped a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
In addition, as the cooling system is up or replaced with plain water. workshop without delay.
pressurised, wait at least one hour Reservoir capacities:
after switching off the engine before
carrying out any work. - screenwash: approximately 3.5 litres,
To avoid any risk of scalding, un- - screenwash and headlamp wash: Used products
screw the cap by two turns to approximately 6.15 litres.
allow the pressure to drop. When
Avoid prolonged contact of
the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap and top up the level. ! used oil or fluids with the
skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to
Coolant change health or indeed very corrosive.
The coolant does not have to be
changed. X

Fluid specification Do not discard used oil or

fluids into sewers or onto the
The coolant must conform to the ground.
manufacturer's recommendations.
Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop (France) or
to an authorised waste disposal
site.

173
 CHECKS

CHECKS Air filter and passenger compartment filter Particle filter system (Diesel)
Unless otherwise indicated, check Refer to the servicing Complementary to the catalytic con-
these components in accordance with booklet for details of the verter, this filter makes an active
the servicing booklet and according to replacement intervals for contribution to the preservation of air
your engine. these components. quality by the retaining of the unburnt
Otherwise, have them checked by a Depending on the environ- pollutant particles. Black exhaust
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. ment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and fumes are thus no longer emitted.
the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driv- After prolonged idling or driving at very
Battery ing), replace them twice as often low speeds, you may occasionally no-
The battery does not re- if necessary (refer to the "Engines" tice water vapour being emitted from
quire any maintenance. section). the exhaust when accelerating. This is
A clogged passenger compartment of no consequence to the running of
However, check that the the vehicle or to the environment.
terminals are clean and filter may have an adverse effect on
correctly tightened, particu- the performance of the air condition-
larly in summer and winter. ing system and generate undesirable
odours.
When carrying out work on the battery,
refer to the "Practical information" sec-
tion for details of the precautions to be If there is risk of blockage, a mes-
taken before disconnecting the battery sage appears in the instrument
and following its reconnection. Oil filter panel screen, accompanied by an
audible signal and illumination of
Replace the oil filter each the service warning lamp.
time the engine oil is This alert tells you that the particle
changed. filter is starting to fill up (in condi-
tions of urban driving of exception-
Refer to the servicing booklet for de- ally long duration: low speeds, traffic
tails of the replacement interval for jams etc.)
X The presence of this label, in par- this component. To regenerate the filter, it is advised
ticular with the Stop & Start system, to drive as soon as possible, when
indicates the use of a specific 12 V traffic conditions permit, at a speed
lead-acid battery with special tech- of 40 mph (around 60 km/h) or
nology and specification, for which more for at least five minutes (until
the involvement of a CITROËN the alert message disappears).
dealer or a qualified workshop is If this alert persists, consult a
required when replacing or discon- CITROËN dealer or a qualified
necting the battery. workshop.
Failure to observe this recommenda-
tion may shorten the life of the battery.
174
 CHECKS

Manual gearbox Brake disc wear

Only use products recom-
The gearbox does not re- For information on check-
! mended by CITROËN or
quire any maintenance (no products of equivalent quality
ing brake disc wear, con- and specifications.
oil change). tact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop. Do not use a dry cloth with an abra-
sive product for the maintenance of
Refer to the servicing booklet for the aluminium parts; use a sponge and
details of the level checking interval soapy water.
for this component.
In order to optimise the operation
of units as important as the braking
system, CITROËN selects and of-
Automatic gearbox Parking brake fers very specific products.
To avoid damaging the electrical
If a loss of effectiveness units, the use of a high pressure
The gearbox does not re- of this system is noticed, washer in the engine compartment
quire any maintenance (no the parking brake must be is strictly prohibited.
oil change). checked, even between
two services.
Refer to the servicing booklet for de- This system must be checked by a
tails of the level checking interval for CITROËN dealer.
this component.

Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the X
style of driving, particularly in
the case of vehicles used in
town, over short distances.
It may be necessary to have
the condition of the brakes checked,
even between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a
drop in the brake fluid level indicates
that the brake pads are worn.

175
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

TEMPORARY PUNCTURE Using the kit

REPAIR KIT
) Switch off the ignition.
Complete system consisting of a ) Affix the speed limitation sticker
compressor and a sealant cartridge to the vehicle's steering wheel
which permits the temporary repair to remind you that a wheel is in
of the tyre so that you can drive to temporary use.
the nearest garage.

) Check that the switch A is in

position "0".
) Connect the pipe of the car-
tridge 1 to the valve of the tyre to
be repaired.

The kit is located in the boot under

the floor.
) Connect the compressor's elec-
tric plug to the vehicle's 12 V
This repair kit is available from socket.
XI CITROËN dealers or a qualified ) Start the vehicle and leave the
workshop. engine running.
It is designed to repair holes of a
maximum diameter of 6 mm, locat-
ed exclusively on the tyre tread or
shoulder. Avoid removing any for-
eign bodies which have penetrated
the tyre.
176
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

) Switch on the compressor by mov-

If this pressure has not been
ing the switch A to position "1"
until the tyre pressure reaches ! reached after approximately
2.0 bars. five to ten minutes, the tyre
cannot be repaired; contact a
CITROËN dealer to have your ve-
hicle repaired.

) Remove the compressor and un-

clip and store the cartridge in a
sealed bag to avoid staining your
vehicle with traces of fluid.
) Drive immediately for approxi-
mately two miles (three kilome-
tres), at reduced speed (between
15 and 35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]),
to plug the puncture.
) Stop to check the repair and the
pressure.

) Connect the compressor pipe di-

rectly to the valve of the repaired
wheel.
XI

177
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

) Connect the compressor's elec-

Take care as sealant car-
tric plug to the vehicle's 12 V
socket again. ! tridge contains ethylene-gly-
col. This product is harmful
) Start the vehicle again and leave if swallowed and causes irritation
the engine running. to the eyes. Keep it out of reach of
children.
The expiry date of the sealant is
indicated on the base of the car-
tridge.
The cartridge is designed for a sin-
gle use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the car-
) Adjust the pressure using the tridge into the environment, take it
compressor (to inflate: switch A in to a CITROËN dealer or an autho-
position "1"; to deflate: switch A in rised waste disposal site.
position "0" and press button B), Do not forget to obtain a new car-
in accordance with the vehicle's tridge, available from CITROËN
tyre pressure label (located on dealers or a qualified workshop.
the door aperture on the left-hand
side), then remember to check that
the leak has been plugged cor-
rectly (no further loss of pressure
after several miles [kilometres]).
) Remove the compressor, then If the vehicle is fitted with tyre
store the whole kit. under-inflation detection, the tyre
) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph under-inflation warning lamp will
[80 km/h] max) limiting the dis- remain on after the wheel has been
tance travelled to approximately repaired until the system is reini-
120 miles (200 km). tialised by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
XI ) Visit a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as
possible to have the tyre repaired
or replaced by a technician.

178
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

CHANGING A WHEEL

Access to the tools

List of tools 1. Wheelbrace

All of these tools are specific to your 2. Jack
vehicle and may vary according to 3. Tool for the removal/refitting of
equipment. Do not use them for any bolt protectors
The tools are to be found in a protec- other purpose. 4. Towing eye
tive holder inside the spare wheel.
5. Moveable chock
) Pull back the retaining strap for
access.

XI

179
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Access to the spare wheel

To remove the spare wheel To reposition the spare wheel

The tyre pressures are indi-
) Lift up the boot floor and fold in
two (Saloon) or hook it using the
) Position the spare wheel flat in
the boot, then pull it towards
! cated on the label located on
the driver's side centre door
retractable handle (Tourer). you. pillar. Tyre pressures are given for
) Detach the strap then push the ) Next place the toolbox inside the different vehicle loading conditions.
wheel forwards so as to be able wheel, then secure the assembly
to lift it. with the strap.
) Release the boot floor to return it
to its initial position.

XI

180
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Removing a wheel ) Continue to extend the jack until

the wheel is a few centimetres
off the ground.
) Undo the bolts, remove the wheel.

Before positioning the

) Park the vehicle on stable, firm
ground that is not slippery. apply
! jack:
the parking brake. ) Always adjust the vehicle’s
ground clearance to the "maxi-
) If your vehicle is equipped with mum height" position and re-
"Hydractive III+" suspension, with ) Position the jack at one of the four
jacking-points provided on the un- tain this adjustment for as long
the engine running at idle, adjust as the jack is under the vehicle
the ground clearance to its maxi- derbody close to the wheels, then
use the wheelbrace to unwind the (do not use the hydraulic ad-
mum height. justments),
) Switch off the ignition and en- jack until it reaches the ground.
) Immobilise your vehicle on hor-
gage first gear or reverse gear izontal, stable and non-slippery
depending on any slope (for a ground,
vehicle with automatic gearbox,
select position P). ) Ensure that any passengers
have left the vehicle and are in
) If your vehicle is fitted with a safe place.
"Hydractive III+" suspension, po-
sition the chock, whichever direc- Never get underneath the vehicle if
tion the gradient may be in, in front it is supported only by the jack.
of the front wheel diametrically op- The jack and all of the tools are
posite to the one to be replaced. specific to your vehicle. Do not use
them for any other applications.
Have the original wheel repaired
and refitted as soon as possible. XI

) Remove the protector from each

bolt using tool 3.
) Slacken the wheel bolts.
181
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Wheel for temporary use Fitting a wheel

If your vehicle is fitted with a
) Fit the wheel on the hub, using ! spare wheel of a different size
the centring guide. Make sure to those on the vehicle, you
that the contact surface between must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
the hub and the wheel is clean. whilst using the spare wheel.
) Screw in the bolts but do not fully The wheel bolts are specific to the
tighten them. type of wheel.
) Lower the jack and remove it. If the type of wheel is changed,
check with your CITROËN dealer
) Tighten the wheel bolts, using or a qualified workshop that the
the wheelbrace. wheel bolts are compatible with the
) Refit the protectors on the bolts. new wheels.
Your vehicle may be fitted with a ) Return the ground clearance to Take care to note down the code
spare wheel which is different to the normal position. number engraved on the head of
those on the vehicle. When fitting ) Ensure the tyre pressure is cor- the security bolt socket. This will
the spare wheel, it is normal to no- rect and have the balancing enable you to obtain a replace-
tice that the wheel bolt washers do checked. ment security bolt socket from your
not come into contact with the wheel dealer.
rim. The spare wheel is secured by
the conical tapering of the wheel
bolt’s shaft. Under-inflation detection
When refitting the original wheel, en- These wheels have tyre pressure
sure that the wheel bolt contact surfac- sensors. Repairs must be carried
es are clean and in good condition. out by a CITROËN dealer or a quali-
fied workshop.

Security bolts (according to

version)
Each wheel is equipped with one se-
XI curity bolt.
To remove it:
) Remove the protector using tool 3.
) Use the security socket with the
wheelbrace.

182
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

CHANGING A BULB Front lamps

Model with Xenon headlamps
(D1S)
The headlamps are fitted with
! polycarbonate glass with a
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs must be replaced by
protective coating: a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
) do not clean them using a workshop.
dry or abrasive cloth, nor You are advised to change both
with a detergent or solvent D1S bulbs at the same time, if one
product, of them has failed.
) use a sponge and soapy water,
) when using a high pressure
washer on persistent marks, do
not keep the lance directed to-
wards the lamps or their edges
for too long, so as not to dam-
age their protective coating and 1. Dual-function Xenon
seals. headlamps (dipped/main): D1S
2. Cornering lighting: HP19
3. Daytime running lamps/
sidelamps (LEDs)
) Do not touch the bulb directly
with your fingers, use lint-free
cloths. For the maintenance of the front
Changing a bulb should only be lamps and changing HP19 and
done after the headlamp has been D1S bulbs and LED lamps, contact
switched off for a few minutes (risk a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
of serious burns). workshop.
It is imperative to use only anti- XI
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs in order
not to damage the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.

183
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Sidelamps Model with halogen headlamps Main beam headlamps

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

qualified workshop.

1. Main beams: H1 ) Remove the protective cap A.

2. Dipped beams: H7 ) Disengage the retaining spring.
3. Directional lighting: H7 ) Remove the bulb and replace it,
4. Daytime running lamps/ paying attention to the direction
sidelamps (LEDs) of fitting.
) Refit the retaining spring.
For the maintenance of the front lamps ) Refit the protective cap A.
and changing LED lamps, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified work-
shop.

XI

184
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Sidelamps Dipped beam headlamps Directional lamp

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a

qualified workshop.

) Remove the protective cap B. ) Remove the protective cap C.

) Disconnect the connector by ) Disconnect the connector by
pressing it between the thumb pressing it between the thumb
and index finger. and index finger.
) Free the bulb from its two metal ) Free the bulb from its two metal
clamps. clamps.
) Take out the bulb. ) Take out the bulb.
) Replace the bulb, exerting a ) Replace the bulb, exerting a
slight axial force. slight axial force.
) Refit the connector, until it is all ) Refit the connector, until it is all
the way in. the way in.
) Refit the protective cap B. ) Refit the protective cap C.

XI

185
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Direction indicators Front foglamps

) Remove the fixing screw of cover A ) Remove the fixing screw of cover A
using a torx tool, tip the cover over using a torx tool, tip the cover over
and remove. and remove. ) Disconnect the connector D.
) Remove the fixing screw of lamp B ) Remove the fixing screw of lamp B ) Remove the bulb by performing
using a torx tool and pull the head- using a torx tool and pull the head- a quarter of a turn.
lamp unit to remove it from the lamp unit to remove it from the ) Replace the bulb.
bumper. bumper.
) Refit the connector D.
) Detach the bulb C by pressing
on bars 1 and 2. ) Refit the headlamp unit in the
bumper.
) Disconnect the connector (pull
whilst pressing on the grey ) Refit the lamp screws.
tongue using a flat screwdriver). ) Position the cover using its guides
) Replace the bulb. and refit the screws.
) Refit the connector (push the Bulbs: H8
grey tongue in well).
) Refit the headlamp unit in the
bumper.
XI ) Refit the lamp screws.
) Position the cover using its
guides and refit the screws.
Bulbs: HP24W

186
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Side repeaters Rear lamps (Saloon) Boot-mounted lamps

) Open the boot.

The side repeater is sealed. ) Using a flat screwdriver, remove
Identify the failed bulb. the 3 clips which fix the trim in
If the bulb is faulty, replace the side 1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: the lamp area.
repeater. P 21 W/5 W ) Partially remove the trim F.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a 2. Sidelamps: R 5 W
qualified workshop. ) Disconnect the connector G.
3. Reversing lamp: H 21 W
4. Foglamps: H 21 W
5. Direction indicators: PY 21 W

When refitting, take care not to

trap the electrical cables.

XI
) Unclip the bulb holder H.
) Replace the bulb.
) Refit the bulb holder H.
) Check that the bulb holder H is se-
cured correctly by the two clips 6.
) Refit the connector G.
) Replace and fix the trim F with its
clips.
187
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Wing-mounted lamps

) Detach the bulb holder D.

) Replace the bulb.
) Refit the bulb holder D.
) Place the lamp in its housing.
) Screw in the 2 fixings C.
) Refit connector B.
) Refit the trim A.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw
or unscrew the fixings C.

) Remove the lateral boot trim ) Disconnect connector B.

flap A. To do so, pull it towards ) Unscrew the 2 fixings C.
the inside of the boot, then pull it
upwards. ) Remove the lamp from its housing.
XI

188
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Rear lamps (Tourer) Boot-mounted lamps

Identify the failed bulb. ) Open the boot. ) Unclip the bulb holder J.
1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: ) Using a flat screwdriver, remove ) Replace the bulb.
P 21 W/5 W the plastic cover F. ) Refit the bulb holder J ensur-
2. Sidelamps: R 5 W ) Disconnect the connector G. ing that it is correctly clipped in
3. Reversing lamp : H 21 W ) Unscrew the fixing nut H. place.
4. Foglamps: H 21 W ) Disengage the lamp from its ) Position the lamp in its housing.
5. Direction indicators: PY 21 W housing. ) Tighten the fixing nut H.
) Refit the connector G.
) Position and clip in place the
plastic cover F.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw
or unscrew the fixing nut H.

XI

189
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Wing-mounted lamps

) Detach the bulb holder D.

) Replace the faulty bulb.
) Refit the bulb holder D.
) Place the lamp in its housing.
) Screw in the fixing nut C.
) Refit the connector B.
) Refit the trim A.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw
or unscrew the fixing nut C.

Remove the lateral boot trim A. ) Disconnect the connector B.

To do so: ) Unscrew the fixing nut C.
) Pull it towards towards the inside ) Remove the lamp from its housing.
XI of the boot.
) Pull it upwards.

190
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Number plate lamps (W5W) Third brake lamp (LEDs)

) Remove the lens. For the replacement of this type

) Change the faulty bulb. of LED lamp, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.

) Insert a thin screwdriver into one XI

of the external holes of the lens.
) Push it outwards to unclip it.

191
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Interior lamps Boot lamp Floor lighting

Roof lamps ) Detach the cover and use a W 5W ) Detach the cover and use a W 5W
) Unclip the transparent cover of bulb. bulb.
the roof lamp to reach the bulb.
Bulb: W 5W
Map reading lamp
) Detach the cover. Pavement lighting Glovebox
) If necessary, detach the partition
of the affected map reading lamp.

Rear reading lamps (Tourer)

XI
) Detach the cover and use a W 5W ) Detach the cover and use a W 5W
bulb. bulb.

) Detach the cover of the reading

lamp to access the bulb.
Bulb: W 5W
192
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

CHANGING A FUSE Fuses under the dashboard

Procedure for replacing a faulty fuse
with a new fuse to rectify a failure of Access to the fuses
the corresponding function. ) open the glove box then unclip
The 2 fuseboxes are located below the access cover.
the dashboard and under the bonnet.

Replacing a fuse
Before replacing a fuse, you should
ascertain the cause of the fault and Fusebox A
have it remedied. the numbers of the
fuses are indicated on the fusebox.
Replace the fuse that has blown
with one of the same rating (same
colour).
Use the special tweezer 1 placed on
the flap close to the fuseboxes.

Good Failed
Tweezer 1

XI

Tweezer 1

Fusebox C Fusebox B
193
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

FUSEBOX A Table of fuses

Fuse N° Rating Function

G29 - Not used
G30 5A Heated door mirrors
G31 5A Rain and sunshine sensor
G32 5A Seat belt not fastened warning lamps
G33 5A Electrochromatic rear view mirror
G34 20 A Sunroof (saloon)
G35 5A Passenger door lighting - passenger door mirror adjustment
G36 30 A Electric tailgate (tourer)
G37 20 A Heated front seats
G38 30 A Driver’s electric seat
G39 30 A Passenger’s electric seat - HIFI amplifier
G40 3A Trailer relay unit supply

FUSEBOX B

Fuse N° Rating Function

15 A 6 speed automatic gearbox
XI G36
5A 4 speed automatic gearbox
G37 10 A Daytime running lamps - Diagnostic socket
G38 3A ESP
G39 10 A Hydraulic suspension
G40 3A STOP switch
194
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

FUSEBOX C

Fuse N° Rating Function

F1 15 A Rear screen wipe (Tourer)
F2 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay
F3 5A Airbags
Automatic gearbox - additional heater unit (Diesel) -
F4 10 A electrochrome rear view mirror
Front window - sunroof - passenger door lighting -
F5 30 A passenger door mirror adjustment
F6 30 A Rear window
Vanity mirror lighting - Glove box lighting - interior lamps -
F7 5A torch (tourer)
Radio - CD changer - Steering mounted controls - Screen - Under-inflation detection -
F8 20 A Electric boot ECU
F9 30 A Cigar lighter - front 12 V socket
F10 15 A Alarm - Steering mounted controls, signalling and wiper controls
F11 15 A Low current ignition switch
Driver’s electric seat - instrument panel - seat belt not fastened warning lamps -
F12 15 A air conditioning controls
Engine relay unit - Hydraulic suspension pump cut-off relay -
F13 5A airbag ECU supply

Rain and sunshine sensor - parking sensors - passenger’s electric seat - XI

F14 15 A trailer relay unit - HIFI amplifier ECU - Bluetooth system -
Lane Departure Warning System

F15 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay

F17 40 A Heated rear screen - heated door mirrors
FSH SHUNT PARK SHUNT
195
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Fuses under the bonnet Table of fuses

Fuse N° Rating Function

F1 20 A Engine control unit
F2 15 A Horn
F3 10 A Screen wash pump
F4 10 A Headlamp wash pump
F5 15 A Starter
Airflow sensor - Directional headlamps -
F6 10 A Diagnostic socket
Automatic gear lever lock -
F7 10 A Power steering
Access to the fuses F8 25 A Starter motor
) Undo each screw by a 1/4 turn. F9 10 A Clutch switch - Stop switch
) Replace the fuse.
F10 30 A Actuator motors
F11 40 A Air conditioning blower
F12 30 A Wipers

F13 40 A BSI supply (ignition on)

F14 30 A -
F15 10 A Right-hand main beam
F16 10 A Left-hand main beam
XI
After a repair, carefully refit the F17 15 A Right-hand dipped beam
cover.
F18 15 A Left-hand dipped beam
Any repairs on the MAXI fuses
(that give additional protection), F19 15 A Actuator motors
located in the fuseboxes, must
be left to a CITROËN dealer or a F20 10 A Actuator motors
qualified workshop. F21 5A Actuator motors
196
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Table of fuses

Fuse N° Rating Function

F6 25 A Rear 12 V socket (max power: 100 W)
F7 15 A Foglamps
F8 20 A Additional burner (Diesel)
F9 30 A Electric parking brake

Your vehicle’s electrical sys-

! tem is designed to operate
with either standard or op-
tional equipment.
Before installing electrical equip-
ment or accessories on your vehi-
cle, consult a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
CITROËN declines all responsibil-
ity for the consequences and costs
that are caused by faults or repairs
on your vehicle resulting from the
installation of accessories that
are not supplied and/or not rec-
ommended by CITROËN and not
installed in conformity with its re-
quirements, particularly when the
total consumption of additional de-
After a repair, carefully refit the vices exceeds 10 milliamperes.
cover. The Maxi fuses give additional pro- XI
If the cover is not correctly po- tection to electrical systems. any
sitioned or not properly closed, work on them must be carried out
this could cause serious prob- by a CITROËN dealer or a quali-
lems on your vehicle. For the fied workshop.
same reason, take care not to
spill any liquid in the fusebox.

197
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

BATTERY Access to the battery V6 HDi engine

Procedure for charging your battery
when it is flat or for starting the en-
gine using another battery.

The battery is located under the

The presence of this label, in bonnet. The battery is located in the boot under
! particular with the Stop & Start For access to it:
the left-hand wing trim.
system, indicates the use of a For access to it:
12 V lead-acid battery with special ) open the bonnet using the interi-
or release lever, then the exterior ) open the boot,
technology and specification; the
involvement of a CITROËN dealer safety catch, ) open the flap and remove the
or a qualified workshop is essential ) secure the bonnet stay, battery.
when replacing or disconnecting ) remove the plastic cover to gain
the battery. access to the two terminals,
Failure to observe this recommen- ) unclip the fusebox to remove the
dation may cause premature wear battery, if necessary.
of the battery.

XI After refitting the battery, the Stop &

Start system will only be active after
a continuous period of immobilisa-
tion of the vehicle, a period which
depends on the climatic conditions
and the state of charge of the bat-
tery (up to about 8 hours).

198
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Starting using another Charging the battery using a Do not disconnect the terminals
battery battery charger ! while the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
The Stop & Start battery does not Do not touch the clips during the
have to be disconnected for charging. operation.
Do not lean over the batteries.
) Disconnect the battery from the Disconnect the cables in the re-
vehicle. verse order to connection, ensur-
ing that they do not touch.
) Follow the instructions for use
provided by the manufacturer of
the charger. Before disconnecting the
) Reconnect starting with the neg- battery
) Lift the pins to remove the front ative terminal (-). Wait 2 minutes after switching off
left headlamp cover (V6 HDi en- ) Check that the terminals and the ignition before disconnecting
gine). connectors are clean. If they are the battery.
) Connect the red cable to the covered with sulphate (whitish or Close the windows and the doors
positive terminal (+) of the flat greenish deposit), remove them before disconnecting the battery.
battery A, then to the positive ter- and clean them.
minal (+) of the slave battery B.
Following reconnection of the
) Connect one end of the green or The batteries contain harmful battery
black cable to the negative ter- substances such as sulphuric
minal (-) of the slave battery B. acid and lead. They must be Following reconnection of the bat-
V6 HDi engine: the positive ter- disposed of in accordance tery, switch on the ignition and wait
minal (-) is located under the red with regulations and must not, in 1 minute before starting to permit
cover. any circumstances, be discarded initialisation of the electronic sys-
with household waste. tems. However, if slight malfunctions
) Connect the other end of the remain following this operation, con-
green or black cable to the earth Take used remote control batteries tact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
point C on the broken down ve- and vehicle batteries to an autho- workshop.
hicle. rised collection point.
Referring to the corresponding sec-
XI
) Operate the starter, let the en- tion, you must yourself reinitialise:
gine run.
- the remote control key,
) Wait until the engine returns to
idle and disconnect the cables. - the glass panoramic roof blind,
It is advisable to disconnect the
battery if the vehicle is to be left un- - the GPS satellite navigation
used for more than one month. system.

199
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

ENERGY ECONOMY MODE Exiting economy mode TOWING THE VEHICLE

System which manages the duration These functions are reactivated auto- Procedure for having your vehicle
of use of certain functions to con- matically next time the vehicle is towed or for towing another vehicle
serve a sufficient level of charge in driven. using a removable towing eye.
the battery. ) In order to resume the use of
After the engine has stopped, you can these functions immediately, start
still use functions such as the audio the engine and let it run for a few
and telematics system, windscreen minutes.
wipers, dipped headlamps, courtesy The time available will then be dou- Access to the tools
lights, etc. for a maximum combined ble the duration for which the en-
duration of thirty minutes. gine was left running. However, this
time will always be between five and
thirty minutes.

Switching to economy mode

A flat battery prevents the en-
Once the thirty minutes are over, a ! gine from starting (refer to the
message appears on the multi-function corresponding paragraph).
screen indicating that the vehicle has
switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
If the telephone is being used at this
time:
- it will be maintained for 5 minutes
with radio-CD hands-free kit,
- it will be interrupted after 10 minutes The towing eye is installed in the
with the MyWay audio-navigation jack box placed in the spare wheel.
system,
For access to it:
- you can complete your call with
the NaviDrive system. ) open the boot,
XI ) raise the floor,
This period may be significantly re-
duced if the battery charge is low. ) remove the towing eye from the
jack box.

200
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle

Failure to observe this special con-

dition could result in damage to
certain braking components and
the absence of braking assistance
the next time the engine is started.
In the event of a fault or malfunc-
tion with the electronic gearbox
system, the vehicle may be immo-
bilised with a gear engaged. In this
case the front of the vehicle must
be lifted for towing.

) On the front bumper, unclip the ) On the rear bumper, unclip the
cover by pressing at the top. cover by pressing:
) Screw the towing eye in fully. - on the right (Saloon),
) Attach the towing bar. - at the bottom (Tourer).
) Switch on the hazard warning ) Screw the towing eye in fully.
lamps on the towed vehicle. ) Attach the towing bar.
) Place the gear lever in neutral ) Switch on the hazard warning
(position N on the automatic gear- lamps on the towed vehicle.
box).

When towing with all four wheels

on the ground, always use a towing
bar. XI
When towing with only two wheels
on the ground, always use profes-
sional lifting equipment.
When towing with the engine off,
there is no longer any braking or
steering assistance.

201
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

TOWING A TRAILER, Driving advice The maximum towed load on a long

A CARAVAN, ETC. incline depends on the gradient and
Distribution of loads the ambient temperature.
) Distribute the load in the trailer In all cases, keep a check on the
Towbar suitable for the attachment so that the heaviest items are as coolant temperature.
of a trailer or caravan with additional close as possible to the axle and
lighting and signalling. the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without ex-
ceeding it. ) If the warning lamp and
Air density decreases with altitude, the STOP warning lamp
thus reducing engine performance. come on, stop the vehicle
Above 1 000 metres, the maximum and switch off the engine
towed load must be reduced by 10 % as soon as possible.
for every 1 000 metres of altitude.
Refer to the "Technical Data" section
for details of the weights and towed Braking
loads which apply to your vehicle. Towing a trailer increases the braking
distance.
Your vehicle is primarily designed
for transporting people and luggage, To avoid overheating of the brakes
but it may also be used for towing a on a long mountain type of descent,
trailer. the use of engine braking is recom-
mended.
We recommend the use of genuine Side wind
CITROËN towbars and their har-
nesses that have been tested and ) Take into account the increased Tyres
approved from the design stage of sensitivity to side wind. ) Check the tyre pressures of the
your vehicle, and that the fitting of the towing vehicle and of the trailer,
towbar is entrusted to a CITROËN observing the recommended
dealer or a qualified workshop. Cooling pressures.
Towing a trailer on a slope increases
the temperature of the coolant. Lighting
If the towbar is not fitted by a
XI ! CITROËN dealer, it is impera-
As the fan is electrically controlled,
its cooling capacity is not dependent
) Check the electrical lighting and
signalling on the trailer.
tive that it is fitted in accordance on the engine speed.
with the vehicle manufacturer's in- ) To lower the engine speed, re-
structions. duce your speed.
Driving with a trailer places greater The rear parking sensors will be
demands on the towing vehicle and deactivated automatically if a gen-
the driver must take particular care. uine CITROËN towbar is used.

202
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Blanking cover ROOF BARS

Maximum load that can be
The design of your vehicle requires ! distributed on the roof bars
the use of roof bars that are tested (for a loading height not
and approved by CITROËN, for your exceeding 40 cm; except bicycle
safety and to avoid damage to the carrier): 80 kg.
roof and tailgate. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt
Regardless of the type of loading your speed to the profile of the road
equipment to be transported on the to avoid damaging the roof bars
roof (bicycle carrier, ski carrier…), it and the fixings on the roof.
is imperative that you add transverse Please refer to national legislation
roof bars. Any securing or lashing to in order to comply with the regula-
components other than the roof bars tions concerning the transportation
is strictly prohibited. of objects which are longer than
the vehicle.

When towing, you must remove the

blanking cover in the front bumper
as well as the bonnet seal if fitted.
Recommendations
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop for this. ) Distribute your load evenly, avoid-
ing overloading on one side.
) Arrange the heaviest part of the
load as close as possible to the
roof.
) Anchor the load securely and
draw attention to it if any part of
it is overhanging.
) Drive gently, as the vehicle will
be more liable to the effects of
side winds (vehicle stability may XI
be altered).
) Remove the roof bars as soon
as they are no longer needed.

203
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

VERY COLD PROTECTION*

Adjustable device which prevents
the intake of snow particles, which
could obstruct the air filter.

HDi Diesel 160 PEF engine V6 HDi Diesel 240 PEF engine

Normal position Snow position Snow position

The flap 2 is in a horizontal position ) Push and rotate the knob 1 by Slide the deflector 1 into the air
in the air duct 3. 90 ° in the direction of the arrow duct 2 and clip in.
in order to position the flap 2 in a
vertical position in the air duct 3.
To return to the normal position,
push the knob 1 then rotate in the
XI opposite direction.
It is essential to remove the very
cold protection:
- When the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C.
- When driving at speeds of over
75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).
* According to country.
204
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

COLD CLIMATE SCREEN*

Removeable screen which prevents
the accumulation of snow at the
radiator cooling fan.

Fitting
) Offer up the 2 sections of the
snow guard to the upper and low-
er sections of the front bumper. Before fitting After fitting
) Press on the surround to clip in
one by one the fixing clips.

Remove
) Using a screwdriver, lift it up to
detach each fixing clip one by one.

It is essential to remove the snow guard:

- When the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C,
- When towing,
- When driving at speeds of over XI
75 mph (approximately 120 km/h).

* According to country.
205
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Matt paint
If you vehicle is finished with a clear
Never clean the vehicle without water.
matt lacquer, please observe the fol-
lowing recommendations to avoid ! Never wash your vehicle in an automatic roller brush car wash.
damaging the paintwork by the use Never polish the vehicle body, nor the alloy wheels. Doing this will make the
of an inappropriate procedures. paintwork shiny.
These recommendations are also Do not use paint cleaners, abrasive products or paint polishing or preserving
valid for alloy road wheels finished products (such as wax, for example) on the paintwork. These products are
with clear matt lacquer. only suitable for bright finishes. Application of these products on vehicles
with a matt finish will seriously damage the paint surface of the vehicle, giving
rise to irreversible shiny or stained areas.
Never use a high pressure jet wash with a lance fitted with a brush, this may
scratch the paintwork.
Never select a wash programme that finishes with a hot wax cycle.

We recommend the use of a high pressure jet wash, or at least a water hose
with a high output.
We recommend that the vehicle be rinsed using de-ionised water.
Use only a microfibre cloth to dry the vehicle. It must be clean and used
without heavy pressure.
Lightly wipe off any fuel stains present on the lacquer using a soft cloth, then
leave to dry.

From the range of cleaning and maintenance products recommended and approved
XI by CITROËN, use only products for removing insects and car shampoo.
Always have paint repairs done by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

206
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

ACCESSORIES "Comfort": "Security and safety":

front and rear parking sensors, iso- anti-intrusion alarm, warning triangle
A wide range of accessories and therm module, reading lamp, sun and high visibility vest, breathalyzer,
genuine parts is available from the blinds… first aid kit, snow chains, non-skid
CITROËN dealer network. covers, security wheel bolts, vehicle
These accessories and parts have tracking system, child seats, fire ex-
been tested and approved for reli- tinguisher, caravan mirror…
ability and safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle
and benefit from CITROËN's recom- "Transport solutions":
mendation and warranty. boot liner, boot carpet, towbars, tow-
bar wiring harness, transverse roof
bars, bicycle carrier, ski carrier, roof
boxes, boot dividers, boot net… "Protection":
mats*, seat covers, mud flaps, bum-
per protectors, vehicle covers, door
sill protectors…

"Style":
alloy wheels, rear spoiler, chromed
mirror shells…

XI
* To avoid any risk of jamming of
the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is posi-
tioned and secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of
another.
207
 P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

"Multimedia":
WIFI on board, 230 V socket, audio
systems, speakers, portable naviga-
tion systems, hands-free kit, DVD
player, USB Box, mapping update
CD, speed camera detectors, Hi-Fi
module…

Installation of radio Depending on the legislation in

communication transmitters force in the country, it may be com-
Before installing any after-market pulsory to have a high visibility
radio communication transmitter, you safety vest, warning triangle and
can contact a CITROËN dealer for spare bulbs and fuses available in
the specification of transmitters which the vehicle.
can be fitted (frequency, maximum
power, aerial position, specific instal-
lation requirements), in line with the
Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (2004/104/EC).
The fitting of electrical equip-
! ment or accessories which
are not recommended by
CITROËN may result in a failure of
your vehicle's electronic system and
excessive electrical consumption.
Please note this precaution. You
XI are advised to contact a CITROËN
representative to be shown the
range of recommended equipment
and accessories.

208
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Model codes:
5FS-8/P 5FV-5FN/A 5FV-5FN/8 RFJF
RD... RW...

PETROL ENGINES 1.6 litre VTi 120 1.6 litre THP 155 2 litre 16V

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598 1 997

Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 85 x 88

EU standard maximum power 88/120 115*/159 103/143
(kW)/hp DIN
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000 6 000

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 160 240 200

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 1 400 4 000

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes

Electronic gearbox system Automatic Manual Automatic

GEARBOXES
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (4-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement) 4.25 4.25 4.25 5

* In Russia, the maximum power is 110 kW and in Brazil, the maximum power is 120 kW.
XII

209
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

Petrol engines 1.6 litre VTi 120 1.6 litre THP 155 2 litre 16V

Gearboxes Electronic gearbox system Automatic Manual Automatic

Model codes:
5FS-8/P 5FV-5FN/A 5FV-5FN/8 RFJF
RD...
- Unladen weight 1 425 1 515 1 471 1 583
- Kerb weight 1 500 1 590 1 546 1 658
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 018 2 026 2 065 2 090

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 318 3 526 3 565 3 590

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 500 1 500 1 500

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer 1 570 1 710 1 730 1 720
within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 64 69 70 69
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
XII must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
210
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg

Petrol engines 1.6 litre VTi 120 1.6 litre THP 155 2 litre 16V

Gearboxes Electronic gearbox system Automatic Manual Automatic

Model codes:
5FS-8/P 5FV-5FN/A 5FV-5FN/8 RFJF
RW...
- Unladen weight 1 498 1 534 1 503 1 619
- Kerb weight 1 573 1 609 1 578 1 694

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 133 2 200 2 167 2 224

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 433 3 700 3 667 3 724

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 500 1 500 1 500

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer 1 600 1 790 1 790 1 800

within GTW limit)

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 65 74 73 72
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. XII
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
211
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Model codes:
9HL/8 9HR/8 RHR-RHF/H-8
RD... RW...

DIESEL ENGINES HDi 110 e-HDi 110 HDi 140

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 997

Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 85 x 88

EU standard maximum power (kW)/hp DIN 82/112 103*/140

Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 3 500 4 000

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 280 320

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 2 000

Fuel Diesel Diesel

Catalytic converter Yes Yes

Particle emission filter (PEF) Yes Yes

Manual Electronic gearbox system Manual

GEARBOXES
(5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement) 3.75 5.25

XII * In Belgium, the maximum power is 100 kW.

212
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES

Model codes:
RHH-RHE-RHD/8 RHH-RHE-RHD/A 4HL/A X8Z/A
RD... RW...

DIESEL ENGINES HDi 160 HDI 200 V6 HDi 240

Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 2 179 2 993

Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 96 84 x 90

EU standard maximum power 120*/163 147/206 177/240
(kW)/hp DIN
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 3 750 3 500 3 800

EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 340 420 450

Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000 1 600

Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes

Particle emissions filter (PEF) Yes Yes Yes

Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic

GEARBOXES
(6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)

OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)

Engine (with flter replacement) 5.5 5.25 6.25

XII
* In Russia, the maximum power is 100 kW.

213
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 110 e-HDi 110 HDi 140

Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system Manual

Model codes:
9HL/8 9HR/8 RHR-RHF/H-8
RD...

- Unladen weight 1 506 1 525 1 608

- Kerb weight 1 581 1 600 1 683

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 041 2 062 2 155

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 141 3 162 3 755

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 100 1 100 1 600

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer within 1 340 1 340 1 820
GTW limit)
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 55 55 73

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
XII must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx.) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

214
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (SALOON) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 160 HDi 200 V6 HDi 240

Gearboxes Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic

Model codes: RHH-RHE- RHH-RHE- 4HL/A X8Z/A

RD... RHD/8 RHD/A

- Unladen weight 1 563 1 609 1 731 1 766

- Kerb weight 1 638 1 684 1 806 1 841

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 156 2 190 2 231 2 276

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 656 3 290 3 831 3 676

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 500 1 100 1 600 1 400

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer within
GTW limit) 1 740 1 390 1 820 1 650

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 70 57 73 67

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. XII
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx.) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.

215
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 110 e-HDi 110 HDi 140

Gearboxes Manual Electronic gearbox system Manual

Model codes:
9HL/8 9HR/8 RHR-RHF/H-8
RW...

- Unladen weight 1 538 1 540 1 655

- Kerb weight 1 613 1 615 1 730

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 153 2 174 2 276

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 153 3 174 3 776

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 000 1 000 1 500

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer within GTW 1 300 1 300 1 800
limit)
- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 53 54 72

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
XII must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
216
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (TOURER) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 160 HDI 200 V6 HDi 240

Gearboxes Manual Automatic Automatic Automatic

Model codes: RHH-RHE- RHH-RHE- 4HL/A X8Z/A

RW... RHD/8 RHD/A

- Unladed weight 1 595 1 642 1 767 1 763

- Kerb weight 1 670 1 717 1 842 1 838

- Goss vehicle weight (GVW) 2 238 2 286 2 367 2 347

- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 638 3 286 3 967 3 647

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)

on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 400 1 000 1 600 1 300

- Braked trailer* (with load transfer within
GTW limit) 1 670 1 290 1 890 1 570

- Unbraked trailer 750 750 750

- Recommended nose weight 67 53 76 63

* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced
by the same amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. XII
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
217
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS - COMMERCIAL VERSIONS (TOURER) in kg

Diesel engines HDi 110 HDi 140

Gearboxes Manual Manual

Model codes:
9HL0/U RHF8/U
RW...
- Unladen weight 1 486 1 585
- Kerb weight* 1 561 1 660

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)** 2 155 2 247

- Gross train weight (GTW)*** 3 155 3 747

- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient**** 1 000 1 500
- Braked trailer (with load transfer within GTW X X
limit)
- Unbraked trailer 750 750
- Recommended nose weight 53 72

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + the driver (75 kg).
** Exceeding the maximum weight on the rear axle when towing involves restricting the maximum speed to 80 km/h (approxi-
mately 50 mph) as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
*** Exceeding the gross vehicle weight when towing involves restricting the maximum speed to 80 km/h (approximately
50 mph) as defined by point 2.7 of the EU Directive.
**** Maximum braked trailer weight within the GTW limit; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have
XII an adverse effect on its road holding.
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the ambient temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
218
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

DIMENSIONS (IN MM)

Exterior (Saloon)

A 2 815

B 1 054

C 910

D 4 779

E 1 586

F 2 096

G 1 557

H 1 860

I* 1 451

* Without roof bars.

XII

219
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Interior (Saloon)

A 1 030

B 1 115

C 566

D 504

E 1 040

F 1 705

XII

220
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Exterior (Tourer)

A 2 815

B 1 054

C 959

D 4 829

E 1 586

F 2 096

G 1 557

H 1 860

I* 1 479

* Without roof bars.

XII

221
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

Interior (Tourer)

A 1 060

B 1 115

C 510

D 851

E 1 058

F 1 723

XII

222
 T E C H N I C A L D ATA

IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS

Various visible markings for identifi- A. VIN plate B. VIN stamped on body
cation of the vehicle. On the left hand centre door pillar.
The vehicle identification number 1. EU type approval number.
(VIN) is also indicated on the regis-
tration document. 2. Vehicle Identification Number C. VIN on dashboard
(VIN).
All genuine CITROËN replacement
parts are available exclusively within 3. Gross vehicle weight.
the dealer network. 4. Gross train weight. D. Paint colour code and tyre reference
For your safety and in order to remain 5. Maximum weight on front axle. Tyre pressures
within the terms of the warranty, you 6. Maximum weight on rear axle. On the driver's side centre pillar.
are advised to use only CITROËN
replacement parts.

Observe the tyre pressures indi-

cated by CITROËN.
Check the tyre pressures regularly,
when cold.
Never deflate a warm tyre.
When changing tyres, it is essen- XII
tial to use the sizes recommended
for your vehicle.

223
XII

224
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
225
 EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
EMERGENCY CALL ASSISTANCE CALL

In an emergency, press this button for more than Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
2 seconds. Flashing of the green indicator lamp and a assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
voice message confirm that the call has been made to the
CITROËN Emergency team*. A voice message confirms that the call has been made*.

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
indicator lamp goes off. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.

The green indicator lamp remains on (without flashing) when

communication is established. It goes off at the end of communication.
OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
This call is dealt with by the CITROËN Emergency team which receives
locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the When the ignition is switched on, the green
appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not indicator lamp comes on for 3 seconds
operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, indicating that the system is operating
the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the correctly.
vehicle location.
If the orange indicator lamp flashes: there is a
system fault.
If an impact is detected by the airbag ECU, and independently
of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made If the orange indicator lamp is on continuously:
automatically. the backup battery must be replaced.
In either case, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If you benefit from the CITROËN eTouch offer, you also have available
additional services in your MyCITROEN personal space, via the CITROËN
Internet website www.citroen.co.uk.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITROËN dealer network,
we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services
* These services are subject to conditions and availability. and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
Consult a CITROËN dealer. configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.

226
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL USING
NAVIDRIVE 3D
EMERGENCY CALL ASSISTANCE CALL

Warning - the emergency call and the services are only active
if the internal telephone is used with a valid SIM card. With a
Bluetooth telephone and without a SIM card, these services are not Press this button for access to CITROËN services.
operational.

In an emergency, press the SOS button until an audible Select "Customer call" to request
signal is heard and a "Confirmation/Cancellation" any information about the CITROËN RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

screen is displayed (if valid SIM card inserted). marque. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

A call is made to the CITROËN Emergency team which

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

receives locating information from the vehicle and Customer call

can send a detailed alert to the relevant emergency
services.
In countries in which the team is not operational, or
when the locating service has been expressly declined, Select "CITROËN Assistance" to make
the call is sent to the emergency services (112). a breakdown assistance call. RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

CITROËN Assistance
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently
of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made
automatically. This service is subject to conditions and availability. Consult a
CITROËN dealer. If you have purchased your vehicle outside the
The message "Deteriorated emergency call" associated with CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the
flashing of the orange indicator lamp indicates a malfunction. configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your
Consult a CITROËN dealer. wishes.

227
228
 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3
NAVIDRIVE 3D
ABC DEF

4 5 6

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
GPS EUROPE

CONTENTS
The NaviDrive 3D is protected in such a way that it 01 First steps p. 230
will only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed
in another vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for 02 Voice commands and steering p. 232
configuration of the system. mounted controls
03 General operation p. 235
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 240
For safety reasons, it is imperative that the driver
carries out operations which require prolonged attention
05 Traffic information p. 249
while the vehicle is stationary. 06 Radio p. 251
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the NaviDrive 3D switches off 07 Music media players p. 252
following the activation of the Energy Economy mode.
08 Using the telephone p. 257
09 Configuration p. 261
10 Screen menu map p. 262
Certain functions described in this handbook will
become available during the course of the year.
Frequently asked questions p. 267

229
 01 FIRST STEPS
NaviDrive 3D CONTROL PANEL

1 PQRS TU
Short press: clears the last
character.
* 0
2 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Long press: activates voice

3 1 2 3 recognition.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
4 8 9 GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

7 10 * 0 #

5 6 11
12

1. CD eject. ADDR BOOK: access to the "Address book" Menu 6. Automatic search for a radio station on a higher frequency.
2. RADIO: access to the "Radio" Menu. (function described in detail in section 10). Selection of the next CD or MP3 track.
Display the list of stations in alphabetical SETUP: access to the "SETUP" Menu 7. Normal display or black screen.
order (FM waveband) or frequency order (configuration) (function described in detail in
sections 02 and 10). 8. Selection of the successive display on the screen
(AM waveband). of "MAP"/"NAV" (if navigation is in progress)/"TEL"
MEDIA: access to the "Media" Menu (Audio CD, Long press: GPS coverage. (if a conversation is in progress)/"RADIO" or
Jukebox, External Device). 3. Audio settings (Balance/Fader, Bass/Treble, "MEDIA" currently being played.
Display the list of tracks. Change of source. Musical Ambience...). 9. PICK UP: access to the "Phone" menu.
NAV: access to the "Navigation" Menu and display 4. Volume adjustment (each source is independent, With Bluetooth connection, accept an incoming call.
of the last destinations. including message and navigation alert). 10. HANG UP: access to the "Phone" menu.
ESC: abandon the operation in progress. Long press: reinitialisation of the system. Hang up the current call or refuse an incoming
Long press: return to the main display. Short press: mute. call, with Bluetooth connection.
TRAFFIC: access to the "Traffic" Menu (function 5. Automatic search for a radio station on a lower 11. Entering of numbers or letters on the alpha-numeric
described in detail in sections 02 and 10). frequency. keypad, pre-selection of 10 radio frequencies.
Selection of the previous CD or MP3 track. 12. SD card reader.

230
 01 FIRST STEPS
NaviDrive 3D NAVIGATOR

1 2 3
ABC DEF

13 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

14
* 0 #

13. OK: confirmation of the highlighted item on the - 4-direction navigator: press up/down. 14. Rotation of the ring:
screen. When "RADIO" is displayed: selection of the When the "RADIO" screen is displayed: selection
- 4-direction navigator: press to the left/right. previous/next radio station on the list. of the previous/next radio station on the list.
When the "RADIO" screen is displayed: selection When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed: selection When the "MEDIA" screen is displayed: selection
of the previous/next frequency. of the MP3 directory. of the previous/next CD or MP3 track.
When "MEDIA" is displayed: selection of the When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: vertical When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: front/rear
previous/next track. movement of the map. map zoom.
When "MAP" or "NAV" is displayed: horizontal Switch to the next or previous page of a menu. Movement of the menu selection curser.
movement of the map. Movement on the virtual keypad displayed.

231
 02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
CONTEXT SAY ACTION
VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE GENERAL Help address book Access to the address book help
RECO. INITIATION Help voice control Access to the voice recognition help
Help media Access to the media management help
Help navigation Access to the guidance, navigation help
Help telephone Access to the telephone help
1 Help radio Access to the radio help
Cancel To cancel a voice command which is in
Before using the system for the first time, you are advised to listen progress
to, say and practice the tutorial. Correction Request to correct the last voice recognition
carried out
Clear

RADIO Select station Select a radio station

2 Station <tts:stationName> Select a radio station using its RDS
description <tts:station Name> from the
RADIO list
Press the SETUP button and select Read out station list Listen to the list of stations available
the "Language & Speech" function. NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Enter frequency Listen to the frequency of the current radio

Turn the ring and select "Voice control".
1 2 3

SETUP
ABC DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
station
Activate voice recognition.
7 8 9

Select wave band Choose the frequency waveband (AM or FM)

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

AM Change the frequency waveband to AM

Select "Tutorial". FM Change the frequency waveband to FM
TA on Activate Traffic Info (TA)
TA off Deactivate Traffic Info

NAVIGATION Destination input Command to enter a new destination

The phrases to be spoken according to the context are indicated in address
the tables below. Voice advice off Deactivate the spoken guidance instructions
Speak and NaviDrive 3D acts. Voice advice on Activate the spoken guidance instructions
Save address Save an address in the address book
Start guidance Start guidance (once the address has been
entered)
Abort guidance Stop the guidance
Navigate entry Start guidance to an entry in the address
Pressing the end of the lighting book
control stalk activates voice POI Search Start guidance to a point of interest
recognition.

232
02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
CONTEXT SAY ACTION
VOICE COMMANDS - VOICE MEDIA Media Select the MEDIA source
RECO. INITIATION Select media Choose a source
Single slot Select the CD player source
Jukebox Select the Jukebox source
USB Select the USB player source
External device Select the audio AUX input source
SD-Card Select the SD card source
Track <1 - 1 000> Select a specific track (number between
1 and 1 000) on the active MEDIUM
Folder <1 - 1 000> Select a Folder (number between 1 and
1 000) on the active MEDIUM

TELEPHONE Phone menu Open the Telephone Menu

Enter number Enter a telephone number to be called
Phone book Open the phone book
Dial Make a call
Save number Save a number in the phone book
Accept Accept an incoming call
Reject Reject an incoming call

ADDRESS Address book menu Open the address book

BOOK Call <entry> Call file using its <file> description as
described in the address book
Navigate <entry> Start guidance to an address in the address
book using its <file> description

233
 02 VOICE COMMANDS AND STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

1 1. Successive presses: "Black 3. Rotation: provides access to the short-cut menus depending on
Panel" mode - black screen (night the display on the screen. 3
driving). Short press: confirm the choice displayed on screen.
2. Short press to make a telephone 5
Long press: return to the main menu. MENU
call.
4. Short press: abandon the current operation. 6
2 Pick up/Hang up.
Reject an incoming telephone call.
Access the telephone menu.
Long press: return to the initial display.
Display the calls list.
5. Menu: provides access to the main menu.
Long press to reject an incoming call. 7
6. VOL +: volume increase.
Short press: activate the voice 7. VOL -: volume decrease.
recognition. 8. Successive presses: mute/restore sound.
Long press: repeat the current 9. Short press: Radio: higher frequency. 8
navigation instruction. Music players: next track.
Long press for fast play.
10. Short press: Radio: lower frequency. LIST 9
Music players: previous track. 11
Successive presses: gives
access to the Radio and Media Long press for fast play.
screen depending on the 11. Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or
current display. the list of tracks, albums, folders. 10
Long press: update the list of stations received.

234
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Press the MODE button several times in succession to gain access to the following displays:

RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA/ FULL SCREEN MAP

VIDEO

TELEPHONE NAVIGATION
(If a conversation is in progress) (If guidance is in progress)

TRAFFIC TRAFFIC:
SETUP: access to the Traffic Menu: display of the current
traffic alerts.
SETUP access to the "SETUP" Menu: system language*
and voice functions*, voice initialisation (section 09),
date and time*, display, unit and system parameters.
MEDIA
MEDIA:
* Available according to model. "DVD-audio" menu
"DVD-Video" menu

Long press: access to the GPS coverage and to the demonstration

mode. For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
For maintenance of the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth "Screen menu map" section of this handbook.
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, without any additional product.
235
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Trip info TELEPHONE:

Pressing OK gives access to short-cut 2
menus according to the display on the
screen. Route type End call
1
3

Avoid Hold call

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN 3
1
PROGRESS):
Satellites Dial
Abort guidance 3
1
1

Stopovers DTMF-Tones
Repeat advice 3
1
1

Browse route Private mode

Block road 2
1
1

Zoom/Scroll Micro off

Unblock 2
1
2

More Voice advice MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

2 1

Less Route options TA

1 1
2

Calculate Route type Play options

2 1
2

Zoom/Scroll Route dynamics Normal order

2 2
2

Browse route Avoidance criteria Random track

2 2
2

Route info Recalculate Scan

1 2 2

Show destination Select media

2 1

236
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

RADIO: FULL SCREEN MAP: North Up

2

In FM mode Abort guidance/Resume guidance Heading Up

1 1 2

TA Set destination/Add stopover Zoom/Scroll

2 1 1

RDS POIs nearby

2 1

Radiotext Position info

2 1

AUDIO DVD (LONG PRESS):

Regional prog. Guidance options
2 2

Stop
AM Navigate to 1
2 3

In AM mode Group
1
Dial 2
3

TA Group 1 .2/n
2
Save position 3
3

Refresh AM list Play options

2
Zoom/Scroll 2
3

FM Normal order/Random track/Scan

2
Map Settings 3
1

TA
2D Map 1
2

Select media
2.5D Map 2
2

3D Map
2

237
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

VIDEO DVD (LONG PRESS): Examples:

Play
1

Stop
2

DVD menus
2

DVD menu
3

DVD top menu

3

List of titles
3

List of chapters
3

DVD Options
2

Audio
3

Subtitles
3

Angle
3

238
 NaviDrive 3D IS:

- the map setting which allows the map to be displayed flat, in perspective or in 3D.

Flat map

Map in perspective

Map in 3D

- configuration of the system by means of voice commands.

239
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The "NAVIGATION" voice commands are listed in section 02.
SELECTING A DESTINATION During guidance, a long press on the end of the lighting stalk repeats the
last guidance instruction.

1 4
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP
Select the "Address input" function
and press OK to confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV 1 2 3

Press the NAV button.

ABC DEF 1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

Address input

5
Once the country has been selected,
ADDR

The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

turn the ring and select the town

ABC DEF

Menu function.
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

function. Press OK to confirm.

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2 6
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and Select the letters of the town one
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
ADDR RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

press OK to confirm.
1 2 3

by one confirming each time by

ABC DEF
ABC DEF

4 5 6 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9

pressing OK.
PQRS TUV WXYZ
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 # * 0 #

Navigation Menu

3
Select the "Destination input"
A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

function and press OK to confirm. 1 2 3

country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

keypad.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Destination input

240
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
It is possible to scroll the map using the 4-direction navigator. It is possible
to select its orientation via the short-cut menu of the "Full screen map".
Press OK then select "Map Settings" and confirm.

7 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP
9
Turn the ring and select OK. 1 2
ABC
3
DEF
Then select "Start route guidance" RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and the press OK to confirm.

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

Press OK to confirm.
7 8 9 1 2 3
PQRS TUV WXYZ ABC DEF

4 5 6
* 0 # GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Start route guidance

To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
10
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits. Select the route type: RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

"Fast route", "Short route", or

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

"Optimized route" and press OK to

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

8 * 0 #

confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

and "House number" functions. 7

PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

11
Select the road with the colour RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address corresponding to the route chosen 1 2
ABC
3
DEF

entered in a directory file. Press OK to confirm the selection.

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

and press OK to confirm and start 7

PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

The NaviDrive 3D allows more than 4 000 contact records to be guidance.

saved.

To delete a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last

destinations". It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations", by selecting a junction, a
A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions town centre, geographic coordinates, or directly on the "Map".
from which you can select:

Delete entry Delete list Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

241
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO MY
"HOME ADDRESS"

Select your home address and confirm.

To be set as the "Home address", an address must first be Then select "Edit entry" and confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

entered in the address book, for example from "Destination

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Edit entry

1 4

Press the NAV button twice to display Select "Set as Home address" and
the Navigation Menu.
ADDR NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC SETUP RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

confirm to save.
BOOK

NAV 1 2 3 1 2 3
ABC DEF ABC DEF

4 5 6 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

Navigation Menu Set as home address

2
Select "Destination input" and confirm.
Then select "Choose from address
To start navigation towards "Home", press NAV twice to display the
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA SETUP

book" and confirm.

BOOK

1 2 3

Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and confirm.

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

*
Then select "Navigate HOME" and confirm to start guidance.
0 #

Destination input

242
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
When the map is displayed on the screen, you can select "Map Settings"
ROUTE OPTIONS then "2D Map/2.5D Map/3D Map/North Up/Heading Up". The display of
buildings in 3D mode depends on the progress in town mapping.

1 5
Select the "Route dynamics"
function.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV 1 2 3

Press the NAV button.

ABC DEF

This function provides access to

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

the "Traffic independent", "Semi-

1 2 3
* 0 # ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

dynamic" and "Dynamic" options.

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2 Route dynamics
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm.
1 2 3
ABC DEF

6
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

Select the "Avoidance criteria"

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

function. This function provides

Navigation Menu access to the "Avoid" options RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

(motorways, toll roads, ferries,

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

tunnels).
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

3
Select the "Route options" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP

and press OK to confirm.

BOOK

Avoidance criteria
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Route options 7
Turn the ring and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
4 account the route options selected.
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Select the "Route type" function and 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

Press OK to confirm.
4 5 6

press OK to confirm. This function

ADDR GHI JKL MNO
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

1 2 3
* 0 #

allows you to change the route type.

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Recalculate
Route type

243
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Stopovers can be added to or deleted from the route once the destination
ADDING A STOPOVER has been selected.

1 5
Enter a new address, for example. NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA SETUP
BOOK 1 2 3
ABC DEF

NAV 1 2 3
4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO

Press the NAV button.

ABC DEF

7 8 9
4 5 6 PQRS TUV WXYZ
GHI JKL MNO

7
PQRS
8
TUV
9
WXYZ
* 0 #

* 0 #

Address input

6 Once the new address has

been entered, select "Start route
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA SETUP

2
BOOK

1 2 3

Press the NAV button again or select guidance" and press OK to confirm.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

the "Navigation" Menu function and

ADDR PQRS TUV WXYZ
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

* 0 #

1 2 3

press OK to confirm.
ABC DEF

Start route guidance

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

"Navigation" Menu 7 NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Position the stopover on the list and 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

3 press OK to confirm.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Select the "Stopovers" function and

* 0 #

press OK to confirm.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Stopovers 8
Repeat operations 1 to 7 as many times as necessary then select
"Recalculate" and press OK to confirm.

4 Select the "Add stopover" function

(5 stopovers maximum) and press RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

To change the stopovers, repeat operations 1 to 3 and select

OK to confirm.
1 2 3
ABC DEF

"Rearrange route" (select a stopover, delete it or move it on the

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

*
list using the ring to change the order, confirm its new position and
0 #

Add stopover finish with "Recalculate").

244
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST The points of interest (POIs) indicate all of the service locations in the
(POI) vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP
6 Select the "POI in city" function to
NAV 1 2 3
search for POIs in the city required. ADDR

Press the NAV button.

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP
ABC DEF

4 5 6

Select the country then enter the name

GHI JKL MNO
1 2 3
ABC DEF
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

* 0

of the city using the virtual keypad.

#
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI in city
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

press OK to confirm. 4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

* 0 #

Navigation Menu A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
3 Select the "POI search" function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

7
POI search Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

required.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

4
7 8 9

Select the "POI nearby" function to

PQRS TUV WXYZ

ADDR
* 0 #

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

search for POIs around the vehicle. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

POI in country
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI nearby
8
Select the "POI near route" function
5 Select the "POI near destination" to search for POIs near the route.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

function to search for POIs near the

ABC DEF
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

1 2 3 7 8 9

point of arrival of the route.

ABC DEF PQRS TUV WXYZ

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
* 0 #

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI near destination POI near route

245
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
CITROËN SEND-TO-CAR with Find your destinations on Google Maps then let CITROËN guide you.

REGISTRATION AND ACTIVATION USE

This service only operates with a SIM card from a French, German 1 Search for a POI on http://maps.google.fr. Select it and click on
or Italian service provider. "send".
Select "vehicle" and "CITROËN" then enter the identifier chosen.
Click on "send".
The SIM card must be inserted in the support located in the glove
box. The system does not operate with the Bluetooth connection.
Only the Google Maps results symbolised by a red icon can be sent
to the NaviDrive 3D system.
SIM cards the numbers of which have been the subject of a change
of service provider are not compatible with this service. The "Notes" field is not sent.

1 To access the registration site, go to www.citroen.fr then activate 2 Press this button then select Google Maps and
the account with the registration confirmation email. confirm by pressing OK.
An automatic call is triggered to a voice mail for
receipt of the POI.
2 Register the vehicle and choose the identifier, which will be used to
send POIs from Google Maps.
3
Press on "ADDR BOOK" and select "My Addresses" to display the
3 Activate the service on your NaviDrive 3D in accordance with the list of POIs received.
operating procedure downloaded from the internet website. You can then start guidance, call the POI or display it on the map.
It may take a few minutes for the Google Maps menu to appear.

In order to activate the service, the SIM card used must be that This service is free, with the exception of the cost of the
declared on the Internet site during registration. communication - 2 SMS and 1 call for activation, 1 call for each
Once the service has been activated, you can change SIM card or receipt of a POI (approximately 30 seconds).
service provider.

246
 This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

Service station Airport Cinema

LPG station Railway station Camp site

Garage Bus station Theme parks

CITROËN Port Hospital

Motor racing circuit Industrial estate Pharmacy

Covered car park Supermarket Police station

Car park Bank School

Rest area Vending machine Post office

Hotel Tennis court Museum

Restaurant Swimming pool Tourist information

Refreshment area Golf course Automatic speed camera*

Picnic area Winter sports resort Red light camera*

Cafeteria Theatre Risk area*

* According to availability in the country. 247

 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs POINTS OF INTEREST AND RISK AREAS
(Speed Cameras) SETTINGS

1 Press the NAV button.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

NAV
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

The detailed procedure for updating Risk Area POIs is available

from CITROËN dealers. 2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm.
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Navigation Menu

3 Select the "Settings" function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

SPOKEN INSTRUCTION SETTINGS

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Settings

1 When the navigation is displayed in 4 Select the "POI categories on Map"

the screen, press OK then select or function to select the POIs to be
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

deselect "Voice advice" to activate

ABC DEF

displayed on the map by default.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

or deactivate the spoken guidance

PQRS TUV WXYZ
1 2 3
ABC DEF

4
GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
* 0 #

7 8 9

instructions.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

POI categories on Map

Use the volume button to adjust the
volume.
5 Select "Set parameters for risk
areas" to gain access to the "Display RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

The volume of the Risk Areas POIs alert can only be adjusted on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

during this type of alert. alert" functions.

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Set parameters for risk areas

248
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
The TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages provide information
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND relating to traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and
transmitted to the driver audibly and visually on the navigation map.
DISPLAYING OF THE TMC MESSAGES The guidance system can then suggest an alternative route.

1 4 Select the filter of your choice:

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

TRAFFIC
Messages on route
1 2 3 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP

Press the TRAFFIC button.

ABC DEF BOOK

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO
1 2 3
ABC DEF
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

* 0 #

All warning messages

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Only warnings on route

All messages

The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffic Menu sorted 5
in order of proximity. Select "Geo. Filter".
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Geo. Filter

2 Press the TRAFFIC button again or

select the Traffic Menu function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP
When all of the messages on the route are selected, the addition
press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
of a geographic filter is recommended (within a radius of 3 miles
7
PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

# (5 km) for example) to reduce the number of messages displayed

on the map. The geographic filter follows the movement of the
Traffic Menu vehicle.

3 The filters are independent and their results are concealed.

We recommend:
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Select "Select preferred list" and 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

- a filter over 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffic,
4 5 6

press OK to confirm.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

- a filter over 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a filter on

the route on motorway journeys.

249
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

1 - the station transmits TA messages.

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
- the station does not transmit TA messages.
- TA messages are not activated.
Weather reports Traffic reports
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
Wind Fog radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
Parking Snow/ice of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.

2 Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example: 1

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

With the current audio source displayed 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

Modified signage Narrow carriageway on the screen, press the dial.

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Slippery surface Accident

2 The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
Delay Roadworks
TA
Risk of explosion Road closed
3
Select Traffic Announcements (TA)
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Demonstration Danger 1 2 3

and press the dial to confirm and go

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

to the associated settings. * 0 #

No entry Traffic jam

250
 The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...)

06 RADIO may interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This
phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are
transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

SELECTING A STATION RDS - REGIONAL MODE

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

When the current radio station is 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

Press the RADIO button to display

4 5 6

displayed on the screen, press OK.

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

RADIO the list of stations received locally

sorted in alphabetical order.
Select the station required by turning RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

the ring and press to confirm.

1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
2 The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to
7
PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

# the following short-cuts:

TA
RDS
While listening to the radio, press buttons and Radiotext
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

for the automatic search for a lower or higher 4

GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

Regional prog.
frequency. * 0 #

AM

When the "RADIO" screen is displayed, turn the RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Select the function required and

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3

ring or use the 4-direction navigator to select the

1 2 3

press OK to confirm to gain access

ABC DEF ABC DEF

4 5 6 4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9

previous or next station on the list. to the corresponding settings.

PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same
2 seconds to store the current station. A bleep confirms that it has station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
been stored. in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the
station. station during a journey.
251
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/
USB PLAYER
INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The audio equipment will only play audio files with the extension
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 ".mp3" with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and extension ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc. It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

Connecting an IPod:
To play MP3 type files, connect the IPod using the USB port
(limited functions). It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using
To play ITunes files, connect the IPod using the auxiliary socket of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and
(AUX). displaying problems.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when

recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played During play, exit the "SD-Card" or "USB" source before removing
correctly. the SD card or the USB memory stick from its port.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
To avoid any risk of theft, remove the SD card or the USB memory
stick when you leave your vehicle with the roof open.
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted to
FAT 32.

252
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
SELECTING/PLAYING
CD, MP3/WMA CD, MP3/WMA SD CARD/ MP3 CDs, SD cards or USB peripherals are the compatible sources.
USB PLAYER
1 5
Insert the audio or MP3 CD in the player, the SD RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

card in the card reader or the USB peripheral in the

1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
Press the MEDIA button again or
select the "Media" Menu function and
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
7 8 9 RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP
PQRS TUV WXYZ

USB port. Play begins automatically. * 0 #

1 2 3

press OK to confirm.
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

"Media" Menu
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under "Media" Menu.
6
Select the "Select media" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI

7
2
ABC

5
JKL

8
3
DEF

6
MNO

2
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Press this button.

1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
Select media
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

7
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

3 Select the music source required. 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

When the "MEDIA" screen is RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Press OK to confirm. Play begins.

4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

displayed, turn the ring up or down to 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
* 0 #

select the previous or next compatible

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

source.

4 The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may

RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA depend on the recording programme and/or the parameters used.

Press the MEDIA button. We recommend the ISO 9660 recording standard.

253
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
JUKEBOX
COPYING A CD, A USB MEMORY STICK OR AN SD CARD When copying is in progress, switching off the ignition will interrupt the
ONTO THE HARD DISK process but it will resume directly when the ignition is switched on again.

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

SETUP
5 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Select the tracks required then "Rip

BOOK
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
Insert an audio/MP3 CD, a USB 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

memory stick or an SD card. selection" or select all of the tracks using

GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

"Rip all".

6 Select "[New folder]" to create a new RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Check that the active MEDIA source is that of the medium used folder or select an existing folder 1 2
ABC
3
DEF

(created previously).
4 5 6

(CD, USB or SD card).

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

[New folder]

2 7 "Do you want to change the names of

Press the MEDIA button. Press the
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC RADIO MEDIA SETUP

the tracks that will be ripped?": select

BOOK

MEDIA 1 2 3

MEDIA button again or select Media

ABC DEF

"Yes" to change them or "No".

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Menu and press OK to confirm. * 0 #

Yes No

3 Select "Jukebox management" then RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP
8 To copy an MP3 CD, then select "Real RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

"Add files" and press OK at each step

BOOK

1 2
ABC
3
DEF
time ripping", "Fast ripping"/"High quality 1 2
ABC
3
DEF

to confirm.
4 5 6 4 5 6

(192 kbit/sec)" or "Standard quality

GHI JKL MNO GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #
* 0 #

(128 kbit/sec)" then select "Start ripping".

Add files

4 9
Select "Add files from MP3-Disc" for RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

Confirm the warning message by RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

example and press OK to validate. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
pressing "OK" to start the copy.
1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9 7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 # * 0 #

Add files from MP3-Disc OK

254
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
JUKEBOX
LISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX
RENAMING OR DELETING AN ALBUM

Check that the active source is not the Jukebox in order to be able 1
to rename or delete a track/folder. Press the MEDIA button. RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA
Press the MEDIA button again or
1 Activate the playing of a source other than the Jukebox select Media Menu and press OK
(CD, radio, etc...). to confirm.

2 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA

Press the MEDIA button. 2

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

Select "Jukebox management" and 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

press OK to confirm.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

3
Press the MEDIA button again or
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

select Media Menu and press OK to

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

confirm.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

3
* 0 #

Select "Play options" and press OK RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

Select "Folders & Files" or "Playlists"

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

4 Select "Jukebox management" and * 0 #

then press OK to confirm.

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Jukebox management
Press the ESC button to return to the first file level.
5 Playlists can be created in the Jukebox.
Select "Modify content" and press RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

OK confirm. 1 2
ABC
3
DEF
Media Menu> Jukebox management> Create new playlist. Add the
tracks required one by one then save the change. The "Playlists"
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

play mode must then be selected.

* 0 #

Modify content

255
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
USING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE (AUX)
VIEWING A VIDEO DVD
AUDIO/VIDEO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

1 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP
1 Connect the portable device (MP3 player, camcorder, camera…) to
Insert the DVD in the player. Play begins 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO the RCA socket (white and red for audio; red and yellow for video)
automatically. in the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio cable.
7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2
Press the MEDIA button then press
MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

2
RADIO

MEDIA
If the DVD does not appear on the RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

it again or select the "Media" Menu

screen, press the MODE button to 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6
function and press OK to confirm.
gain access to the "MEDIA" screen
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

which displays the DVD screen.

If the external input is not activated, select "Ext. Device (Aux)
management" to activate it.
3
Press the MEDIA button to gain
access to the DVD menu at any time, Select "Select media" then "External
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC

MEDIA
3
or to the functions of the Media Menu device (AV)" and press OK to RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2 3

which adjust the video (brightness/ activate it.

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

contrast, image format...).

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

External device

The 4-direction navigator and the chromed ring allow you to move 4
the DVD selection cursor. Change chapter by pressing the or Select the AUX music source and
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

button. press OK to confirm. Play begins

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

automatically.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Select the video source required ("DVD-Video", "External device

(AV)"). Press OK to confirm. Play begins. The display and management of the controls is via the portable
device.

256
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
CHOOSING BETWEEN THE BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE/INTERNAL TELEPHONE

To activate the Bluetooth telephone

NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

or the internal telephone, press PICK

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

UP TEL.
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

2
Select Phone menu, then "Select
phone" then choose between
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

"Telephone off", "Use Bluetooth

ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

phone" or "Use internal phone".

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Press OK at each step to confirm.

The system can only be connected to one Bluetooth telephone and

one SIM card (Internal telephone) at the same time.
In this case, the phone book is synchronised with the Bluetooth
telephone.

257
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
* The services available via the telephone depend on the network, the
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to
your telephone's manual and your operator to check which services you
TELEPHONE have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of
services is available from dealers.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention 4 For a first connection, select
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth "Search phone" and press OK to RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
SETUP

mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the NaviDrive 3D

BOOK

confirm. Then select the name of the 1 2

ABC
3
DEF

must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
4 5 6

telephone.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

1 Search phone
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
The last telephone connected is reconnected
automatically. 5
Enter the authentication code on the
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

telephone. The code to be entered is

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

displayed on the screen. * 0 #

2 RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR

BOOK SETUP

Press the TEL button.

1 2 3
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

Once the telephone has been connected, the NaviDrive 3D can

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

synchronise the address book and the call list. This synchronisation
may take a few minutes*.
3 If no telephone is connected, the RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

system prompts you to "Connect 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

phone". Select "Yes" and press OK to

GHI JKL MNO
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP
7 8 9

To change the telephone connected,

PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 # 1 2 3

confirm.
ABC DEF

4 5 6

press the TEL button, then select

GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Phone menu, then "Select phone"

then "Connect Bluetooth phone"
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears then select the telephone required or
"Search phone".
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

in the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required then 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

select "Connect phone" for a new connection. Select "Delete Press OK at each step to confirm.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

*
pairing" to cancel the connection to the telephone.
0 #

258
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
USING THE INTERNAL TELEPHONE WITH If you have declined to use the internal telephone for personal calls, you
can still connect a Bluetooth telephone to receive your calls on the vehicle's
A SIM CARD audio system.

1 4
1 2 3
ABC DEF

Extract the holder by 4

GHI
5
JKL
6
MNO
Enter the PIN code on the keypad NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

then select OK and confirm.

1 2 3

pressing the eject

ABC
ABC DEF
DEF

4 5 6
7 8 9 GHI
GHI JKL
JKL MNO
MNO

PQRS TUV WXYZ 7 8 9

button.
PQRS
PQRS TUV
TUV WXYZ
WXYZ

* 0 #

* 0 #

Remember PIN

2
When entering your PIN code, tick the "Remember PIN" tab to
allow use of the telephone without having to enter this code when it
is used subsequently.
Install the SIM card in the holder
and then insert it in the slot.

5
The system asks "Do you want
to switch to the internal phone?",
select "Yes" if you wish to use your
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3
ABC DEF

SIM card for your personal calls.

4 5 6

3
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Otherwise, only the emergency call * 0 #

To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1. and the services will use the SIM
card.

For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention Once the SIM card has been installed, the system can synchronise
on the part of the driver, the SIM card installation operations must the address book and the call list.
be carried out when stationary. This synchronisation may take a few minutes.

259
 08 USING THE TELEPHONE
RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

1 4
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

1 2 3

Press the PICK UP TEL button.

ABC DEF

display in the screen. 4

GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

* 0 #

2 Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No" RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

to refuse and confirm by pressing OK. 1 2 3

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle
ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9

appears under "Phone" menu. You can select a number and press
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Yes No OK to make the call.

The PICK UP TEL button accepts, the HANG UP TEL button 5 Select the "Phone" menu function
refuses the incoming call.
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA BOOK SETUP

and press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

"Phone" menu
3
To hang up, press the HANG UP TEL
button or press OK and select "End
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
RADIO MEDIA SETUP

Select "Dial number", then dial the

BOOK

1 2
ABC
3
DEF
6
call" then confirm by pressing OK. telephone number using the virtual
4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO ADDR
RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC BOOK SETUP

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

1 2 3

keypad.
* 0 # ABC DEF

4 5 6
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

End call Dial number

Press the steering mounted TEL button to accept E It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You
an incoming call or to end a call in progress. can select "Dial from address book". The NaviDrive 3D can record
up to 4 096 entries.

260
 Principle of GPS synchronisation (GMT):
09 CONFIGURATION 1. Confirm the "Synchronise with GPS" selection, the time is then set to
GMT universal time, the date is also updated.
2. Using the 4-direction navigator, move the cursor to the time fields and
press OK.
3. You can then use the ring to set the time to the time zone of your choice.
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME Note that when changing between summer/winter time, the time zone
must be changed again manually.

This setting operation must be carried out if the battery has been 1
disconnected.
Select the "Date format" function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

1 Select the format required using the 7

PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

SETUP
NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK

1
SETUP

2
ABC
3
DEF
ring and press OK to confirm.
Press the SETUP button. 4
GHI

7
PQRS
5
JKL

8
TUV
6
MNO

9
WXYZ

* 0 #

2
2 Select the "Date & Time" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO
Select the "Time format" function and RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

7
PQRS

*
8
TUV

0
9
WXYZ

#
press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI
2
ABC

5
JKL
3
DEF

6
MNO

Select the format required using the

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

Date & Time

* 0 #

ring and press OK to confirm.

3
Select the "Set date & time" function RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and press OK to confirm. 1

4
GHI

7
2
ABC

5
JKL

8
3
DEF

6
MNO

9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds permits

Set date & time access to:

4 Description of the unit

Make the adjustments using the ring RADIO MEDIA NAV ESC TRAFFIC ADDR
BOOK SETUP

and move on to the next using the 1

4
2
ABC

5
3
DEF

6 GPS coverage
4-direction navigator.
GHI JKL MNO

7 8 9
PQRS TUV WXYZ

* 0 #

Press OK to confirm. Demo mode

261
 10 SCREEN MENU MAP
1
MAIN FUNCTION 4
Within 6 miles (10 km)
3
Create folder

Within 30 miles (50 km) Modify content

OPTION A 4 3
2
Read out settings Edit playlist
option A1 2 3
3
On confirmation Play options
option A2 3 3
3
Incoming messages Folders & Files
OPTION B... 3 4
2
TMC station information Playlists
2 4
TRAFFIC
Memory capacity
3

1
"Traffic" Menu MEDIA

Sound settings
2

Select preferred list 1

"Media" Menu Refer to the "Sound settings" menu details
2
of which are shown on the next page.
3
Messages on route Select media
3 2

Only warnings on route Audio CD/MP3-Disc/DVD-Audio/DVD-Video Video settings

3 3 2

All warning messages Jukebox (Folders & Files) Aspect ratio

3 3 3

All messages SD-Card Menu language

3 3 3

Geo. Filter USB Display

3 3 3

Deactivate PIN External device (audio/AV) Brightness

4 3 4

Within 2 miles (3 km) Jukebox management Contrast

4 2 4

Within 3 miles (5 km) Add files Colour

4 3 4

262
 AUX standard Classic Start route guidance
3 3 4

Reset video settings Jazz Postal code

3 3 4

Ext. Device (Aux) management Rock/Pop Save to address book

2 3 4

Off/Audio/Audio and Video (AV) Techno Intersection

3 3 4

Vocal City district

RADIO
3 4

Mute rear speakers Geo position

1
"Radio" Menu 2 4

Loudness Map
2 4
Waveband
2
Speed dependent volume Navigate HOME
2 3
3 FM
Reset sound settings Choose from last destinations
2 3
3 AM
Choose from address book
3
2
Manual tune NAV

Stopovers
2
2
Sound settings
1
"Navigation" Menu
Add stopover
3
Refer to the "Sound settings" menu below.
Abort guidance/Resume guidance Address input
2
3 4

Destination input Navigate HOME

2
4

1
"Sound settings" Menu Address input Choose from address book
3 4

Balance/Fader Country Choose from last destinations

2 4 4

Bass/Treble City Rearrange route

2 4 3

Equalizer Street Replace stopover

2 4 3

Linear House number Delete stopover

3 4 3

263
 Recalculate Semi-dynamic
3 4

Fast route Dynamic

4 4

1
"Phone" menu
Short route Avoidance criteria
4 3

Optimized route Avoid motorways Dial number

2
4 4

POI search Avoid toll roads Dial from address book

2 4 2

POI nearby Avoid tunnels Call lists

3 4 2

POI near destination Avoid ferries Messages

3 4 2

POI in city Recalculate Select phone

3 3
2

POI in country
3 Telephone off
3
POI near route
ADDR
BOOK

3 Use Bluetooth phone

Route options 1
"Address book" Menu 3

2
Use internal phone
3
Route type Create new entry
3 2 Connect Bluetooth phone
3
POI near destination Show memory status
4
2
Search phone
4
Short route
4 Export address book
2
Disconnect phone
Optimized route 5
4 Delete all voice entries
2
Rename phone
Subscr. service 5
4 Delete all entries
2
Settings Delete pairing
5
2
Delete folder "My Addresses"
2
Route dynamics Delete all pairings
3 5

Traffic independent Show details

4 5

264
 Settings Search for networks Polski
2 3 4

Automatic answering system PIN settings Portuguese

3 3 4

Select ring tone Change PIN Voice control

3 3 3

Phone/Ring tone volume Activate PIN Voice control active

3 4 4

Enter mailbox number Deactivate PIN Tutorial

3 4 4

Internal phone settings Remember PIN Basics

3 3 5

Automatically accept call SIM-card memory status Examples

3 3 5

Signal waiting call (?) Tips

3 5

Show status SETUP

Speaker adaptation
3 4

3
Activate waiting call 1
"SETUP" Menu New speaker adaptation
5

Deactivate waiting call Language & Speech Delete speaker adaptation

3 5
2

Call forward (?) Menu language Voice output volume

3 3
3

Show status Deutsch Date & Time

3 2
4

Activate call forward English Set date & time

3 3
4
Deactivate call forward Date format
3 Español 3
4
Suppress own number Time format
3 Français 3
4
Select network
3 Italiano
4
Set network automatically
3 Nederlands
4
Set network manually
3

265
 Display Units
2 2

Brightness Temperature
3 3

Colour Celsius
3 4

Steel Fahrenheit
4 4

blue light (only in day mode) Metric/Imperial

4 3

Orange Ray km
4 4

Blue Flame Miles

4 4

Map colour System

3 2

Day mode for map Factory reset

4 3

Night mode for map Software version

4 3

Auto. Day/Night for map Automatic scrolling

4 3

266
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning the NaviDrive 3D.

QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sources (radio, CD...). CD...). the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "Linear" and
set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.

The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded
CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.

267
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The stored stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press RADIO, select Radio Menu then
not function (no sound, "Waveband" to return to the waveband on which
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). the stations are stored.

The quality of reception The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
of the radio station to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
listened to gradually vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
deteriorates or the stored geographical area.
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the "RDS" function by means of the
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. short-cut menu if the phenomenon is too frequent
and always on the same route.

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after the battery charge. charge.
a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

268
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

"TA" is selected. On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the Wait until the traffic information is being received
However, certain traffic traffic information. correctly (displaying of the traffic information
jams along the route are symbols on the map).
not indicated in real time.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the This phenomenon is normal. The system is
traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.

The time taken to calculate The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD/DVD Wait until the CD/DVD has been copied or stop
a route sometimes seems is being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being the copying before starting the guidance function.
longer than usual. calculated.

I receive a speed camera The system announces all speed cameras positioned in a cone located Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
alert for a speed camera in front of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras located on nearby or the speed camera.
which is not on my route. parallel roads.

The speed camera The audible warning is not active. Activate the audible warning on Navigation Menu,
audible warning does not Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
work.

The alert volume is set to minimum. Increase the volume of the alert when passing a
speed camera.

Does the emergency call No, as certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in Insert a valid SIM card in the slot.
function work without a order to make an emergency call.
SIM card?

The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely.
displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.

269
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The route calculation is The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the exclusion criteria on the Navigation
not successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). Menu ("Route options" - "Avoidance criteria").

There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
period following the data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
insertion of a CD.

I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible. function is switched on.
- Check that your telephone is visible.

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is
available from the dealer network.

The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the MyWay, to maximum
telephone connected if required, and increase the volume of the
in Bluetooth mode is telephone if necessary.
inaudible.

The system does not play The region protection may not be compatible. Insert DVDs which have compatible region
the DVD. protection.

I cannot copy the CD to The wrong source is selected. Change the active source to CD.
the Jukebox.

The CD is copy-protected. It is normal that a protected CD cannot be copied.

270
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The system does not The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending of the SMS to the system. Use your SIM card and the internal telephone.
receive SMS.

The SIM card used is a twin card. Use the original SIM card to receive the SMS.

I cannot update the risk The Navigation Menu - "Update personal POI" is not displayed. Check that the medium used for the update (SD
area POIs. card or USB memory stick) is inserted correctly.

An error message is displayed at the end of the procedure. - Start the procedure again in full.
- Consult a CITROËN dealer if the problem
persists.
- Check that the data on the MEDIUM is
supplied by an official partner of CITROËN.

The voice frequencies The numeric buttons on the keypad are only active for calls if the display To activate them, press the MODE button until the
(DTMF) are not is in telephone mode. telephone is displayed on the screen.
active when I am
communicating and I
press numbers on the
keypad.

An accident area which The accident areas are displayed near a point defined on the map and in The alert may be triggered when travelling under a
does not concern me is relation to a direction of travel. road or near a road which has a speed camera.
displayed on the screen.

271
272
 MYWAY
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM FOR EUROPE BY SD CARD

CONTENTS
The MyWay is protected in such a way that it will only 01 First steps p. 274
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for configuration of 02 Steering mounted controls p. 275
the system.
03 General operation p. 276
04 Navigation - Guidance p. 279
05 Traffic information p. 287
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is 06 Radio p. 289
stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent 07 Music media players p. 290
discharging of the battery, the MyWay switches off
following the activation of the Energy Economy mode. 08 Bluetooth telephone p. 293
09 Configuration p. 295
10 Trip computer p. 296
11 Screen menu map p. 297
Certain functions described in this handbook will
become available during the year. Frequently asked questions p. 301

273
 01 FIRST STEPS
MyWay CONTROL PANEL

1 11

3 4 5 6
2 13
16
12
7 8 9 10

14 15

1. Engine not running 5. Access to the "SETUP" menu. 12. Selection of the previous/next radio station from
- Short press: on/off. Long press: access to the GPS coverage and the the list.
- Long press: CD pause, mute for the radio. demonstration mode. Selection of the previous/next MP3 folder.
Engine running 6. Access to the "Phone" Menu. Display the call list. Selection of the previous/next page of a list.
7. Access to the "MODE" menu. 13. Selection of the previous/next radio station.
- Short press: CD pause, mute for the radio.
Selection of the successive display of: Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 track.
- Long press: reinitialisation of the system. Selection of the previous/next line of a list.
Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation is in progress),
2. Volume adjustment (each source is Telephone (if a conversation is in progress), 14. Buttons 1 to 6:
independent, including also navigation Trip computer.
messages and alerts). Selection of the stored radio station.
Long press: display of a black screen (DARK). Long press: store the current radio station.
3. Access to the "Radio" Menu. Display the list of 8. Access to the "Navigation" Menu. Display the last
stations. 15. SD card reader (navigation SD card only).
destinations. 16. Dial for selection of the screen display and
4. Access to the "Music" Menu. Display the tracks. 9. Access to the "Traffic" Menu. Display the current according to the context of the menu
3 - 4. Long press: access to the audio settings: traffic alerts. Short press: contextual menu or confirmation.
front/rear fader and left/right balance, bass/ 10. ESC: abandon the operation in progress. Long press: contextual menu specific to the
treble, equaliser, loudness, automatic volume 11. CD eject. list displayed.
adjustment, initialise the settings.
274
 02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

1 1. Successive presses: "Black 3. Rotation: provides access to the short-cut menus depending on
Panel" mode - black screen the display on the screen. 3
(night driving). Short press: confirm the choice displayed on the screen.
2. Short press to make a telephone call. 5
Long press: return to the main menu. MENU
Pick up/Hang up. 4. Short press: abandon the current operation. 6
2 Access the telephone menu. Reject an incoming call.
Display the calls list. Long press: return to the initial display.
Long press to reject an incoming call. 5. Menu: provides access to the main menu.
6. VOL +: volume increase. 7

Press: repeat the current 7. VOL -: volume decrease.

navigation instruction. 8. Successive presses: mute/restore sound.
9. Short press: Radio: higher frequency. 8
Music players: next track.
Long press for fast play.
10. Short press: Radio: lower frequency. LIST 9
Music players: previous track. 11
Successive presses: selection
of the type of information Long press for fast play.
present on the screen. 11. Short press: display the list of radio frequencies available or
the list of tracks, albums, folders. 10
Long press: update the list of stations received.

275
 03 GENERAL OPERATION

Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following menus:

RADIO/MUSIC MEDIA
PLAYERS
FULL SCREEN MAP

TELEPHONE
(If a conversation is in progress)
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)

TRIP COMPUTER

SETUP:
system language*, date and time*, display,
vehicle settings*, unit and system settings, TRAFFIC:
"Demo mode". TMC information and messages.
* Available according to model.

For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product. "Screen menu map" section.

276
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

Zoom/Scroll MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:

2
A press on the OK dial gives access to
short-cut menus according to the display Voice advice Traffic info (TA)
1
on the screen. 1

Route options Play options

1 1

NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN PROGRESS): Normal order

2

Abort guidance Random track

2
1
TELEPHONE:
Repeat advice Repeat folder
2
1
End call
Block road 1 Scan
2
1
Hold call
Route info 1 Select music
1
1
Dial
1
Show destination
2
DTMF-tones
1
Trip info
2
Private mode
1
Route type
3
Micro off
1
Avoid
3

Satellites
3

277
 03 GENERAL OPERATION
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT

RADIO: FULL SCREEN MAP:

In FM mode Abort guidance/Resume guidance

1 1

Traffic info (TA) Set destination

2 1

RDS POIs nearby

2 1

Radiotext Position info

2 1

Regional prog. Map settings

2 1

AM Zoom/Scroll
2 1

In AM mode
1

TA
2

Refresh AM list
2

FM
2

278
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use
the Navigation functions.
SELECTING A DESTINATION The navigation SD card data must not be modified.
Map data updates are available from CITROËN dealers.

1 4
Select the "Address input" function
and press the dial to confirm.
Press the NAV button.

Address input

5
Once the country has been selected,
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation turn the dial and select the town
Menu function. function. Press the dial to confirm.

2 Press the NAV button again or select 6

the Navigation Menu function and Select the letters of the town one
press the dial to confirm. by one confirming each time by
pressing the dial.
Navigation Menu

3
Select the "Destination input"
function and press the dial to A pre-set list (by entering the first few letters) of the towns in the
confirm. country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on the virtual
keypad.
Destination input

279
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
7 9
Turn the dial and select OK. Then select "Start route guidance"
Press the dial to confirm. and the press the dial to confirm.

To speed up the process, the post code can be entered directly Start route guidance
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.

Select the route type:

8 "Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street" to confirm.
and "House number" functions. It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations".

Choose from address book Choose from last destinations

Select the "Save to address book" function to record the address
entered in a directory file. Press the dial to confirm the selection.
MyWay allows up to 500 contact files to be recorded. Map settings
You can zoom in/zoom out on the map using the dial.
It is possible to move the map or select its orientation via the short-cut
menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP.
During guidance, pressing the end Press MODE until the map is displayed full screen. Press the dial
of the lighting stalk repeats the last then select "Map settings". Select "2.5D Map" or "2D Map" and in
guidance instruction. the latter case, select "North Up" or "Heading Up".

To clear a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations".

A long press on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:
Delete entry
Delete list
280
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SETTING AND NAVIGATING TO
MY "HOME ADDRESS"

4
To be set as the "Home address", an address must first be Select your home address and confirm.
entered in the address book, for example from "Destination Then select "Edit entry" and confirm.
input"/"Address input" then "Save to address book".

Edit entry
1
Press the NAV button twice to display
the Navigation Menu.
5
Navigation Menu
Select "Set as home address" and
confirm to save.

2
Select "Destination input" and confirm. Set as "Home address"
Then select "Choose from address
book" and confirm.

Destination input

3 To start navigation towards "Home address", press NAV twice

Select "Address book" and confirm. to display the Navigation Menu, select "Destination input" and
Then select "Search entry (complete confirm.
address book)" and confirm. Then select "Navigate HOME" and confirm to start guidance.

Address book

281
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The route selected by the MyWay system depends directly on the route
ROUTE OPTIONS options.
Changing these options may change the route completely.

1 5
Select the "Route dynamics"
function.
Press the NAV button. This function gives access to
the "Traffic independent" or
"Semi-dynamic" options.

Route dynamics
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confirm.
6
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
Navigation Menu access to the AVOID options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries).
3
Select the "Route options" function
and press the dial to confirm. Avoidance criteria

Route options
7
Turn the dial and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
4 Select the "Route type" function account the route options selected.
and press the dial to confirm. This Press the dial to confirm.
function allows you to change the
route type.
Recalculate
Route type

282
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been
ADDING A STOPOVER selected.

1 5
Enter a new address, for example.
Press the NAV button.
Address input

2 6
Press the NAV button again or select Once the new address has been
the Navigation Menu function and entered, select OK and press the dial
press the dial to confirm. to confirm.

Navigation Menu OK

3 7
Select the "Stopovers" function and Select "Recalculate" and press the
press the dial to confirm. dial to confirm.

Stopovers Recalculate

4
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the
the dial to confirm. guidance to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, the MyWay
will always return you to the previous stopover.
Add stopover

283
 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in
(POI) the vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports...).

1 6 Select the "POI in city" function to

search for POIs in the city required.
Press the NAV button. Select the country then enter the
name of the city using the virtual
keypad.
POI in city
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confirm.
Navigation Menu A list of cities present in the country selected can be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
3 Select the "POI search" function and
press the dial to confirm.

POI search 7
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
4 Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle. POI in country

POI nearby
8
5 Select the "POI near destination" Select the "POI near route" function
function to search for POIs near to search for POIs near the route.
the point of arrival of the route.
POI near route
POI near destination

284
 This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.

LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)

Service station Airport Cinema

LPG station Railway station Camp site

Garage Bus station Theme parks

CITROËN Port Hospital

Motor racing circuit Industrial estate Pharmacy

Covered car park Supermarket Police station

Car park Bank School

Rest area Vending machine Post office

Hotel Tennis court Museum

Restaurant Swimming pool Tourist information

Refreshment area Golf course Automatic speed camera*

Picnic area Winter sports resort Red light camera*

Cafeteria Theatre Risk area*

* According to availability in the country. 285

 04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
To activate or deactivate vocal guidance, with guidance active and
the map displayed on the screen, press the dial and then select or
NAVIGATION SETTINGS deselect "Voice advice".
Voice advice

1 The adjustment of the volume for the Risk Areas POIs is used only
during the transmission of an alert.
Press the NAV button.
5 Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
2 Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and POI categories on Map
press the dial to confirm.
6
Navigation Menu Select "Set parameters for risk
areas" for access to the "Display
on map", "Visual alert" and "Sound
3 alert" functions.
Select the "Settings" function and
press the dial to confirm.
Set parameters for risk areas
Settings

UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs

4 Select the "Navi volume" function
and turn the dial to set the volume
(Speed camera information)
of each voice synthesiser (traffic
information, alert messages…). Contact a CITROËN dealer for the procedure to follow to obtain
the RISK AREA POIs.
Navi volume This requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible reader.

286
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages contain information on
traffic and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to
the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the
navigation map.
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid
a traffic problem.
DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES

1 4 Select the "Geo. Filter" function and

Press the TRAFFIC button. press the dial to confirm.

Geo. Filter

5
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffic Menu sorted Then select the radius of the filter
in order of proximity. in miles (km) required in accordance
with the route, press the dial to
confirm.
When all of the messages on the
2 Press the TRAFFIC button again or route are selected, the addition of a
select the Traffic Menu function and geographical filter is recommended
press the dial to confirm. (within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for
example) to reduce the number of
Traffic Menu messages displayed on the map.
The geographical filter follows the
movement of the vehicle.
3 Select the filter of your choice:
Messages on route
All warning messages The filters are independent and their results are cumulative.
Only warnings on route We recommend a filter on the route and a filter around the vehicle
of:
All messages - 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffic,
The messages appear on the map - 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal traffic,
and on the list. - 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorway).
To exit, press ESC.
287
 05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS RECEIVING TA MESSAGES

1 Black and blue triangle: general information, for example: - the station transmits TA messages.
- the station does not transmit TA messages.
Weather reports Traffic reports
- TA messages are not activated.

Wind Fog The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert

messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic
Parking Snow/ice report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
2 Red and yellow triangle: traffic information, for example:
1
With the current audio source
Modified signage Narrow carriageway displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
Slippery surface Accident

2
Delay Roadworks The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:

Risk of explosion Road closed TA

Demonstration Danger 3
Select Traffic Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confirm and go
No entry Traffic jam to the associated settings.

288
 The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may

06 RADIO interfere with the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon
is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not
in any way indicate a failure of the audio equipment.

SELECTING A STATION RDS - REGIONAL MODE

1 1
Press the RADIO button to display When the current radio station is
the list of stations received locally displayed on the screen, press the
sorted in alphabetical order. dial.
Select the station required by turning
the dial and press to confirm.
2 The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides access to
the following short-cuts:
TA

While listening to the radio, press one of the RDS

buttons to select the previous or next station on Radiotext
the list.
Regional prog.
AM

3
A long press of one of the buttons starts the Select the function required and
automatic search for a station with a lower or press the dial to confirm to gain
higher frequency. access to the corresponding settings.

RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same

Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for more than station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
2 seconds to store the current station. in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the stored radio assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not
station. cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey.

289
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE

The MyWay will only play audio files with the extension ".mp3"
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3 with a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Media Audio and ".wma" with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standards which It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
permit the recording of several tens of music files on a single disc.
No other type of file (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when

recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played
correctly. It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always problems.
used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.

290
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
SELECTING/PLAYING MUSIC
CD, MP3/WMA CD

1 4
Select the music source required:
Press the MUSIC button. CD, MP3/WMA CD. Press the dial to
confirm. Play begins.

The list of tracks or MP3/WMA files appears under Music Menu. Press the up or down button to select
the next/previous folder.

2 Press the MUSIC button again or 6

Press one of the buttons to select a
select the Music Menu function and music track.
press the dial to confirm.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind play.
Music Menu

3
Select the "Select music" function
and press the dial to confirm. The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may
depend on the recording programme and/or the settings used.
We recommend the ISO 9660 file standard.
Select music

291
 07 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
USING THE EXTERNAL INPUT (AUX)
JACK/USB AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED

1
Connect the portable device
(MP3/WMA player…) to the auxiliary
JACK socket or to the USB port,
using a suitable audio cable.

2 Press the MUSIC button then

press it again or select the Music
Menu function and press the dial to
confirm.

Music Menu

3 Select the "External device" function

and press the dial to activate it.

External device

4
Select the AUX music source and
press the dial to confirm. Play begins
automatically.

The display and management of the controls is via the portable

device.

292
 08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and
the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
CONNECTING A TELEPHONE manual and with your network provider for details of the services
available to you. A list of mobile telephones with the best level of
compatibility is available from the dealer network.

3 For a first connection, select

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention "Search phone" and press the dial to
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth confirm. Then select the name of the
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the MyWay must be telephone.
carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.
Search phone

1
4
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function. Enter the authentication code on the
The last telephone connected is reconnected telephone. The code to be entered is
automatically. displayed on the screen.

Once the telephone has been connected, MyWay can synchronise

2 the address book and the call list. This synchronisation may take a
few minutes*.
Press the PHONE button.
1 To change the telephone connected,
press the PHONE button, then select
Phone Menu and press the dial to
confirm.

The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears 2 Select "Connect phone". Select
on the multifunction screen. Select the telephone required for the telephone and press to confirm.
a new connection.
Connect phone

293
 08 BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
RECEIVING A CALL MAKING A CALL

1 1
Press the PHONE button.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display on the multifunction screen.

The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the vehicle
appears under Phone Menu. You can select a number and press
the dial to make the call.
2 Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No"
to refuse and confirm by pressing Select the Phone Menu function and
the dial. 2
press the dial to confirm.
Phone Menu
743.1

Yes No
Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
3 To hang up, press the PHONE button Dial number
or press the dial and select "End call"
then confirm by pressing the dial.
It is also possible to select a number from the address book. You
can select "Dial from address book". The MyWay can record up
to 4 000 entries.
End call
Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than
two seconds to gain access to the address book.

A short press on the steering

mounted TEL button accepts the To delete a number, press the PHONE button then press and hold
incoming call or ends the call in on a call number to display a list of actions including:
progress. A long press rejects Delete entry
the incoming call.
Delete list

294
 09 CONFIGURATION
The SETUP function gives access to the following options: System
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME language, Date & Time, Display (Brightness, Colour, Map colour),
Vehicle, Units, System.

These settings must be entered again if the battery has been 5

disconnected.

Select the "Date format" function and

1 press the dial to confirm.
Press the SETUP button.

2 6
Select the "Date & Time" function
and press the dial to confirm.
Confirm the format required using
the dial.
Date & Time Select the "Time format" function and
press the dial to confirm.

3 Select the "Set date & time" function

and press the dial to confirm.

Confirm the format required using the dial.

Set date & time
Pressing the SETUP button for more than 2 seconds gives
access to:
4 Description of the unit
Adjust the settings one by one using
the direction arrows and confirm by GPS coverage
means of the dial.
Demo mode

295
 10 TRIP COMPUTER/VEHICLE PARAMETERS
TRIP COMPUTER A FEW DEFINITIONS

1 Press the MODE button several Range: displays the distance which can travelled with the
times in succession until the trip remaining fuel detected in the tank, based on the average fuel
computer is displayed. consumption over the last few miles (kilometres).
This displayed value may vary significantly following a change in
the vehicle speed or the relief of the route.
- The "vehicle" tab: When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are
displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is
The range, the current fuel recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
consumption and the distance
remaining or the Stop & Start If, whilst driving, dashes are displayed continuously in place of the
time counter. digits, contact a CITROËN dealer.
- The "1" (trip 1) tab with:
Current fuel consumption: only calculated and displayed above
The average speed, the average 20 mph (30 km/h).
fuel consumption and the
distance travelled calculated Average fuel consumption: this is the average fuel consumption
over trip "1". since the last trip computer zero reset.
- The "2" (trip 2) tab with the same
functions for a second trip. Distance travelled: calculated since the last trip computer zero
reset.
Distance remaining to the destination: calculated with reference
to the final destination, entered by the user. If guidance is activated,
the navigation system calculates it as a current value.
Average speed: this is the average speed calculated since the last
trip computer zero reset (ignition on).
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
Each press of the button at the end of the wiper stalk displays If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates
the different trip computer information in succession, according to the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.
the screen.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.
296
 11 SCREEN MENU MAP
Within 6 miles (10 km) Vocal
1
MAIN FUNCTION 3 4

Within 30 miles (50 km) Loudness

3 3
OPTION A
2
Within 60 miles (100 km) Speed dependent volume
3 3
option A1
3
Reset sound settings
3
option A2
3

OPTION B...
2
1
"Music" Menu RADIO

Select music 1
"Radio" Menu
2

Sound settings Waveband

1
"Traffic" Menu 2 2

Balance/Fader FM
3
Messages on route 3
2
Bass/Treble AM
3
Only warnings on route 3
2
Equalizer Manual tune
2
All warning messages 3
2
Linear Sound settings
2
All messages 4
2
Classic Balance/Fader
3
Geo. Filter 4
2
Jazz Bass/Treble
3
Within 2 miles (3 km) 4
3
Rock/Pop Equalizer
3
Within 3 miles (5 km) 4
3
Techno Linear
4 4

297
 Classic Start route guidance Rearrange route
4 4 3

Jazz Postal code Replace stopover

4 4 3

Rock/Pop Save to address book Delete stopover

4 4 3

Techno Intersection Recalculate

4
4 3

Vocal
4 City district Fast route
4 4
Loudness
3 Geo position Short route
4 4
Speed dependent volume
3
Map Optimized route
4 4
Reset sound settings
3
Navigate HOME POI search
3 2

Choose from address book POI nearby

3 3

Choose from last destinations POI near destination

1
"Navigation" Menu 3 3

TMC station information POI in city

3 3
Abort guidance/Resume guidance
2
Stopovers POI in country
Destination input 2 3
2
Add stopover POI near route
Enter new address 3 3
3

Country Address input Route options

4 2
4

City Navigate HOME Route type

4 4 3

Street Choose from address book Fast route

4 4 4

House number Choose from last destinations Short route

4 4 4

298
 Optimized route
4

Route dynamics 1
"Phone" Menu 1
"SETUP" menu
3

Traffic independent Dial number System language*

4 2 2

Semi-dynamic Dial from address book Deutsch

4 2 3

Avoidance criteria Call lists English

3 2 3

Avoid motorways Connect phone Español

4 2 3

Avoid toll roads Search phone Français

4 3 3

Avoid ferries Phones connected Italiano

4 3 3

Recalculate Disconnect phone Nederlands

3 4 3

Settings Rename phone Polski

2 4 3

Navi volume Delete pairing Portuguese

3 4 3

POI categories on Map Delete all pairings Date & Time*

3 4 2

Set parameters for risk areas Show details Set date & time
3 4 3

Display on map Settings Date format

4 2 3

Visual alert Select ring tone Time format

4 3 3

Sound alert Phone/Ring tone volume

4 3

Enter mailbox number

3
* Available according to model.

299
 Display Units
2 2

Brightness Temperature
3 3

Colour Celsius
3 4

Pop titanium Fahrenheit

4 4

Toffee Metric/Imperial
4 3

Blue steel Kilometres (Consumption: l/100)

4 4

Technogrey Kilometres (Consumption: km/l)

4 4

Dark blue Miles (Consumption: MPG)

4 4

Map colour System

3 2

Day mode for map Factory reset

4 3

Night mode for map Software version

4 3

Auto. Day/Night for map Automatic scrolling

4 3

Vehicle*
2

Vehicle information
3

Alert log
4

Status of functions
4

* Available according to model.

300
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source position, select the Linear musical ambience and
sources (radio, CD...). (radio, CD...). set the loudness correction to the "Active" position
in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.

- Check that the CD is inserted in the player

the right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
The CD is ejected audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
automatically or is not CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment. - The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Because of their quality level, certain
writeable CDs will not be played by the audio
system.

Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. conditions.
The CD player sound is
poor.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. an ambience.

301
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The stored stations do Press the BAND AST button to return to the
not function (no sound, An incorrect waveband is selected. waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). the stations are stored.

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the to check whether there is a more powerful
vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
stations do not function block reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
the audio equipment depends on the battery charge. Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
switches off after a few The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode charge.
minutes of use. and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

302
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

Wait until the traffic information is being received

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive correctly (displaying of the traffic information
TA is selected. However, the traffic information. symbols on the map).
certain traffic jams
along the route are not
indicated in real time.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.

I receive a speed camera The system announces all speed cameras located in a conical zone Zoom the map to view the exact position of the
alert for a camera which forward of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras on nearby or parallel speed camera.
is not on my route. roads.

Activate audible alerts in Navigation Menu,

Audible alerts are not active. Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
The audible speed
camera alert is not
working.
The alert volume level is set to minimum. Increase the speed camera alert volume.

Wait until the system has started up completely.

On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
receive more than 3 satellites correctly. 3 satellites (long press on the SETUP button,
then select GPS coverage).
The altitude is not
displayed.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, dependent on the conditions of reception of
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. the GPS signal.

The route is not The exclusion criteria may conflict with the current location Check the exclusion criteria.
calculated successfully. (exclusion of toll roads on a motorway with tolls).

303
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of This phenomenon is normal.
time after inserting a CD. data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.

- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth

I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipment function is activated.
Bluetooth telephone. may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone is visible.

Increase the MyWay volume setting, possibly to

A telephone connected The volume level depends on both the system and the telephone. maximum, and increase the telephone volume
by Bluetooth is inaudible. level if necessary.

304
 AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM/BLUETOOTH

CONTENTS
01 First steps p. 306
Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will 02 Steering mounted controls p. 307
only operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in
another vehicle, contact your CITROËN dealer for 03 Main menu p. 308
configuration of the system.
04 Audio p. 309
05 USB Box p. 312
06 Bluetooth functions p. 315
07 Configuration p. 317
08 Trip computer p. 318
For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations 09 Screen menu map p. 319
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is
stationary. Frequently asked questions p. 323
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may
switch off after a few minutes.

305
 01 FIRST STEPS

2 9
3 4 5 6 7 8

1 11
10
15 14 13 12

1. On/Off and volume adjustment. 7. Display the list of local stations, of the tracks 12. Selection of a lower/higher radio frequency.
2. CD eject. on the CD or of the MP3 folders. Selection of the previous/next MP3 folder.
3. Selection of the display on the screen from 8. Abandon current operation. Selection of the previous/next USB device
the following modes: 9. TA (Traffic Announcement) function on/off. folder/genre/artist/playlist.
Audio (AUDIO), Trip Computer (TRIP) and Long press: access to the PTY (Types of radio 13. Display the main menu.
Telephone (TEL) functions. programme) mode. 14. Buttons 1 to 6:
4. Selection of source: 10. Confirmation. Selection of a stored radio station.
radio, audio CD/MP3 CD, USB, Jack 11. Automatic search for a lower/higher frequency. Long press: store a station.
connection, Streaming. Selection of previous/next CD, MP3 or USB 15. The DARK button changes the display on the
5. Selection of FM1, FM2, FMast and AM track. screen to improve driving comfort at night.
wavebands. 1st press: lighting the upper band only.
6. Setting audio options: front/rear fader, left/ 2nd press: display of a black screen.
right balance, loudness, sound ambience. 3rd press: return to the standard display.

306
 02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

1 1. Activation/deactivation of the 3. Access to the short-cut menus depending on the display

Black Panel mode (night driving). on the screen. 3
Confirmation of the function selected from a menu.
5
Rotation:
2. Pick up an incoming call/end a call MENU
which is in progress. Selection of the previous/next stored RADIO station. 6
2
Open the telephone menu and Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 directory.
display the calls list. 4. Abandon the current operation.
Long press: reject an incoming Reject an incoming call.
call. Long press: return to the main display. 7
5. Access to the main menu.
6. Volume increase.
7. Volume decrease. 8
8. Mute.
9. RADIO: automatic search for a lower/higher frequency.
CD/MP3: LIST 9
selection of the previous/next track. 10
continuous press: fast forward/rewind play.
10. RADIO: display the list of stations available.
Long press: update the list of radio stations. 9
CD/MP3:
display the list of CD and folder tracks.

307
 03 MAIN MENU

AUDIO FUNCTIONS: radio, TELEPHONE: Bluetooth

CD, USB, options. hands-free, pairing,
management of a call.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN C

TRIP COMPUTER: entering of PERSONALISATION-

distances, alerts, status of functions. CONFIGURATION: vehicle
parameters, display, languages.

> MONOCHROME SCREEN A

For a detailed global view of the
menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section.

308
 The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...)

04 AUDIO may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure
of the audio equipment.

RADIO
SELECTING A STATION
RDS

1 Press the SOURCE button several 1

times in succession and select the Press the MENU button.
radio.

2 2
Press the BAND AST button to select
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM. Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then
press OK.

3
Briefly press one of the buttons to 3
carry out an automatic search of the Select the FM WAVEBAND
radio stations. PREFERENCES function then
press OK.

4
Press one of the buttons to carry 4
out a manual search of the radio Select ACTIVATE RDS then press OK.
stations. RDS appears on the screen.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the
display the list of stations received same station by automatic retuning to alternative fequencies.
locally (30 stations maximum). However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may
To update this list, press for more not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not
than two seconds. cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of
the station during a journey.
309
 04 AUDIO
CD
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
PLAYING A CD

The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert Insert circular compact discs only.
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on the
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is quality of the original player.
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
message. begins automatically.

1 1 To play a disc which has already been

Press the TA button to activate or inserted, press the SOURCE button
deactivate traffic messages. several times in succession and
select CD.

2
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on

the CD.

3
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward.

310
 04 AUDIO
MP3 CD MP3 CD
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION INFORMATION AND ADVICE

Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.

The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
may take anything between a few seconds and several tens several tens of music files on a single disc.
of seconds, before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread
over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of two In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played. recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is
recommended.
While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
All of the files are displayed on a single level. correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording format is always
1 To play a disc which has already used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
been inserted, press the SOURCE (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.
button several times in succession In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is
and select CD. recommended.

2
Press one of the buttons to select a The audio system will only play files with the extension ".mp3" with
track on the CD. a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.

Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using
the MP3 compilation. special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
3
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play. Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.

311
 05 USB BOX
The list of compatible equipment and the compression rates supported
USING THE USB BOX are available from CITROËN dealers.

1 CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK

This unit consists of a USB port and an auxiliary

Jack socket*. The audio files are transmitted 1
from portable equipment such as a digital player Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
or a USB memory stick to your Audio system to using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
be listened to via the vehicle's speakers. on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
is connected. Play begins automatically after a
delay which depends on the capacity of the USB
memory stick.
The file formats recognised are .mp3 (mpeg1
2 USB memory stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or iPod® of layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec
generation 5 or later: compression), .wav and .ogg.
- USB memory sticks should be formatted The playlists types accepted are m3u, .pls, .wpl.
FAT or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),
- the iPod® lead is essential,
- navigation through the file database is by
means of the steering mounted controls, The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created
- the iPod® software should be regularly over a period which depends on the capacity of the USB device.
updated for the best connection. The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
each time a USB memory stick is connected.
3
Other iPod® players of earlier generations and When connecting for the first time, the classification suggested
players using the MTP protocol*: is by folder. When you reconnect, the classification selected
previously is retained.
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),
- navigation through the file database is from
the portable device.
* According to vehicle.

312
 05 USB BOX
USING THE USB PORT

2 4 Press one of these buttons to gain

Press and hold LIST to display the access to the previous/next track on
different classifications. the classification list currently being
Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlist, played.
press OK to select the classification Press and hold one of the buttons for
required, then press OK again to confirm. fast forward or backward play.
OK
5 Press one of these buttons to gain
- by Folder: all folders containing audio
files recognised on the peripheral access to the previous/next Genre,
device, classified in alphabetical Folder, Artist or Playlist on the
order without following the flow chart. classification list currently being
played.
- by Artist: all of the artist names
defined in the ID3 Tags, classified in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres defined in CONNECTING AN iPOD® VIA THE USB PORT
the ID3 Tags.
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
1 The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defined on
the iPod®).
3 Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 5 above.
Press LIST briefly to display the
previously selected classification.
Navigate through the list using the left/
right and up/down buttons. Do not connect a hard disk or USB devices other than audio
Confirm the selection by pressing OK. equipment to the USB port. This could damage your installation.

313
 05 USB BOX
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX) ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
JACK SOCKET OR USB PORT (according to vehicle) OF THE AUXILIARY SOURCE

1
The auxiliary input, JACK or USB, allows the connection of
portable equipment (MP3 player...).

First adjust the volume of your portable device.

Do not connect a single piece of equipment via the JACK socket

and the USB port at the same time.

1 2

Connect the portable equipment

(MP3 player…) to the JACK Then adjust the volume of your audio
socket or to the USB port, using system.
a suitable cable (not supplied).

Press the SOURCE button several The display and control is via the portable
times in succession and select AUX. device.

314
 06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE compatibility of the Bluetooth equipment used.
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which
SCREEN C services are available to you. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best
(AVAILABILITY DEPENDS ON MODEL AND VERSION) range of services is available from the network. Consult a CITROËN dealer.

PAIRING A TELEPHONE The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions
in particular: Directory*, Call list, Pairing management.
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your 6 Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary telephone can be connected at a time.
and the ignition on.

7 A virtual keypad is displayed on the

1 screen: enter a code with at least
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function. 4 digits.
Confirm by pressing OK.

8 A message is displayed on the screen of the

2 telephone chosen: to accept the pairing, enter
Press the MENU button. the same code on the telephone, then confirm by
pressing OK.
In the menu, select:
3 9 If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
- Bluetooth telephone function -
Audio
- Bluetooth configuration 10 "Pairing of Name_telephone successful" appears on the screen.
- Perform a Bluetooth search The automatic connection authorised is only active after the
telephone has been configured.
4 A window is displayed with "Searching...". The directory and the call list can be accessed after the
synchronisation period.

5 The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window. The pairing can also be initiated from the telephone.

315
 06 BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING

RECEIVING A CALL Wireless transmission of the telephone's music files via the audio
equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate
bluetooth profiles (Profiles A2DP/AVRCP).
1 An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed
display on the multifunction screen.
1 Initiate the pairing between the telephone and
the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from
2 the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
Select the YES tab on the display telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 10 on the
using the buttons and confirm by previous pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle
pressing OK. must be stationary with the key in the ignition.

Press the steering mounted control OK to accept 2

the call. Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone automatically.

MAKING A CALL 3 Activate the streaming source by

pressing the SOURCE button*. The
tracks to be played can be controlled
1 From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage as usual via the buttons on the
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory. Radio control panel and the steering
mounted controls**. The contextual
Press the end of the steering mounted control for information can be displayed on
2 more than two seconds to gain access to your the screen.
directory.
Or * In certain cases, playing of the Audio files must be initiated from
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad, the keypad.
with the vehicle stationary. ** If the telephone supports the function.

316
 07 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN C

1 5
Press to confirm the selection.
Press the MENU button.

2 6
Using the arrows, select Using the arrows, select ADJUST
PERSONALISATION DATE AND TIME.
CONFIGURATION.

3 7
Press to confirm the selection.
Press to confirm the selection.

4 8 Adjust the settings one by one

confirming by pressing the OK
Using the arrows, select DISPLAY button. Next select the OK tab on the
CONFIGURATION. screen then confirm.

317
 08 TRIP COMPUTER

A FEW DEFINITIONS
Each press of the button, located at the end of the Range: displays the distance which can travelled with the remaining fuel
wiper stalk, displays the different trip computer detected in the tank, based on the average fuel consumption over the last
information in succession, depending on the screen. few miles (kilometres).
This displayed value may vary significantly following a change in the
vehicle speed or the relief of the route.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed.
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
If, whilst driving, dashes are displayed continuously in place of the digits,
contact a CITROËN dealer.
1 Current fuel consumption: only calculated and displayed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Average fuel consumption: this is the average fuel consumption since
the last trip computer zero reset.
- the "vehicle" tab with:
Distance travelled: calculated since the last trip computer zero reset.
● the range, the current fuel consumption and the distance remaining
to the destination or the Stop & Start time counter,
- the "1" tab (trip 1) with: Distance remaining to the destination: calculated with reference to
the final destination, entered by the user. If guidance is activated, the
● the average speed, the average consumption and the distance navigation system calculates it as a current value.
travelled calculated over trip "1",
- the "2" tab (trip 2) with the same information for a second trip. Average speed: this is the average speed calculated since the last trip
computer zero reset (ignition on).
Stop & Start time counter
Zero reset (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
When the required trip is displayed, press the control for more than If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the
two seconds. time spent in STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the key.

318
 09 SCREEN MENU MAP
DISPLAY ADJUST
MONOCHROME A 1
MAIN FUNCTION 1

YEAR
CHOICE A 2
2
MONTH
Choice A1 2
3

1
RADIO-CD Choice A2 2
DATE
3
HOUR
RDS SEARCH CHOICE B... 2
2 2
MINUTES
REG MODE 2
2
12 H/24 H MODE
2
CD REPEAT
1
OPTIONS 2

RANDOM PLAY DIAGNOSTICS 1

LANGUAGE
2
2

FRANCAIS
CONSULT 2
3

VEHICLE CONFIG* ITALIANO

1
ABANDON 2
3
NEDERLANDS
REV WIPE ACT 2
2
PORTUGUES
2
GUIDE LAMPS 1
UNITS 2

PORTUGUES-BRASIL
2
TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS/°FAHRENHEIT
2
DEUTSCH
2
FUEL CONSUMPTION:
2
KM/L - L/100 - MPG ENGLISH
2

ESPANOL
2
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
319
 09 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME C Press the OK dial for access to short-cut menus according to the display on
the screen:

RADIO CD/MP3 CD USB

activate/deactivate RDS activate/deactivate Intro activate/deactivate track repeat

1 1
(of the current folder/artist/genre/
playlist)
activate/deactivate REG mode activate/deactivate track repeat 1
1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate/deactivate radiotext 1
1
activate/deactivate random play
(of the current folder/artist/genre/
playlist)
activate/deactivate random play 1
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
1

320
 09 SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME C 2
PLAY MODES

3
album repeat (RPT) 1
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION
Pressing the MENU button displays:
activate/deactivate DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS*
4 2

track random play (RDM) DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

3 2
AUDIO FUNCTIONS activate/deactivate
1
4
video brightness adjustment
3

FM BAND PREFERENCES normal video

2
4

alternative frequencies (RDS) inverse video

3
4

activate/deactivate
4
1
TRIP COMPUTER 4
brightness (- +) adjustment

regional mode (REG) date and time adjustment

3
ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION 3
2
activate/deactivate day/month/year adjustment
4
Distance: x miles 3
3
radio-text information (RDTXT) hour/minute adjustment
3 4
ALERT LOG
2
activate/deactivate choice of 12 h/24 h mode
4 4
Diagnostics
3
choice of units
3
STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS*
2
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
4
Functions activated or deactivated
3
°Celsius/°Fahrenheit
4

CHOICE OF LANGUAGE
2
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
321
 09 SCREEN MENU MAP

1
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
BLUETOOTH CONFIGURATION
2

Connect/Disconnect a device
3

Telephone function
3

Audio Streaming function

3

Consult the paired device

4

Delete a paired device

4

Perform a Bluetooth search

4

CALL
2

Calls list
3

Directory
4

MANAGE THE TELEPHONE CALL

2

Terminate the current call

3

Activate private mode

3

322
 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
sound quality between Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
the different audio which may result in audible differences when changing source Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position,
sources (radio, CD...). (radio, CD...). select the musical ambience "None" and set the
loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD
mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the

right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any be played if it is too damaged.
The CD is ejected audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
automatically or is not
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
played by the player.
recognised by the audio equipment. - The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.

The message "USB

peripheral error" is The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection The USB memory stick is not recognised.
Reformat the memory stick.
is cut. The memory stick may be corrupt.

Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. conditions.
The CD player sound is
poor.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. an ambience.
323
 QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION

The stored stations do Press the BAND AST button to return to the
not function (no sound, An incorrect waveband is selected. waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). the stations are stored.

The traffic announcement

(TA) is displayed. I do Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network.
not receive any traffic information.
information.

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the to check whether there is a more powerful
The quality of reception vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
of the radio station
listened to gradually The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
deteriorates or the stored reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...). The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).

Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. permitting better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.

With the engine off, When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
the audio equipment depends on the battery charge. Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
switches off after a few The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode charge.
minutes of use. and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too

The message "the audio high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection Switch the audio system off for a few minutes
system is overheated" mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of to allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. the CD.

324
 VISUAL SEARCH

EXTERIOR (SALOON)

Remote control key....................... 69-74

- opening/closing
- anti-theft protection
- starting Accessories ..................................... 207
- battery Panoramic sunroof ............................ 84
Roof bars ......................................... 203

Very cold climate screen.................. 205

Exterior lighting controls ............... 88-91 Fuel tank ............................................ 86
Headlamp adjustment........................ 91
Changing bulbs......................... 183-187
- front lamps
- foglamps Tailgate .............................................. 81
- direction indicator repeaters Temporary puncture repair kit ... 176-178
Changing a wheel ..................... 179-182
Lane departure warning system ...... 156
- tools
- removing

Door mirrors....................................... 67
Front and/or rear visual and
audible parking sensors................... 159
Towbar ............................................. 202
Doors ............................................ 79-80 Towing ...................................... 200-201
- opening/closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Changing bulbs......................... 187-191
Child lock ..........................................115 Tyre under-inflation detection ....117-118 - rear lamps
Electric windows ........................... 77-78 Braking assistance ...........................119 - 3rd brake lamp
Trajectory control ............................. 120
Tyre pressures ................................. 223 - number plate lamps

325
 VISUAL SEARCH

EXTERIOR (TOURER)

Remote control key....................... 69-74

- opening/closing
- anti-theft protection
- starting Accessories ..................................... 207
- battery Panoramic sunroof ............................ 85
Roof bars ......................................... 203

Very cold climate screen.................. 205

Exterior lighting controls ............... 88-91 Fuel tank ............................................ 86
Headlamp adjustment........................ 91
Changing bulbs......................... 183-187
- front lamps
- foglamps Tailgate .............................................. 82
- direction indicator repeaters Temporary puncture repair kit ... 176-178
Changing a wheel ..................... 179-182
Lane departure warning system ...... 156
- tools
- removing

Door mirrors....................................... 67
Front and/or rear visual and
audible parking sensors................... 159
Towbar ............................................. 202
Doors ............................................ 79-80 Towing ...................................... 200-201
- opening/closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Changing bulbs......................... 189-191
Child lock ..........................................115 Tyre under-inflation detection ....117-118 - rear lamps
Electric windows ........................... 77-78 Braking assistance ...........................119 - 3rd brake lamp
Trajectory control ............................. 120
Tyre pressures ................................. 223 - number plate lamps

326
 VISUAL SEARCH

INTERIOR

Side blinds ....................................... 102 Seat belts.................................. 121-123

Boot fittings (Saloon) ....................... 103

- stowing rings Glove box ........................................ 100
Boot fittings (Tourer) ........................ 104
- stowing rings
- hooks
- storage net...
Load space cover (Tourer)............... 105
Luggage retaining net
(Tourer) ..................................... 105-106

Airbags ..................................... 124-127

Child seats ................................ 107-110

Isofix mountings......................... 111-114

Front seats.................................... 62-65

Rear seats .................................... 65-66

327
 VISUAL SEARCH

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Courtesy lamps............................. 96-97

Rear view mirror ........................... 67-68
Interior mood lighting ......................... 98 Instrument panels .............................. 26
Sun visor.......................................... 100 Warning lamps .............................. 32-38
Stop & Start ..................................... 143 Indicators ...................................... 39-41
Multifunction screens .................... 43-48 Gear efficiency indicator .................. 138
Hazard warning lamps ......................116 Buttons .............................................. 42
- trip recorder
- lighting dimmer
Interior fittings ........................... 100-102 Parking space sensors .................... 157
- glove box
- ski flaps
- auxiliary sockets
Steering wheel adjustment ................ 68
- mats...

Windows ....................................... 77-78

Dashboard fuses ...................... 193-195 Door mirrors....................................... 67

Ventilation ..................................... 49-50

Opening the bonnet ......................... 164 Mono-zone digital
air conditioning ............................. 51-53
Dual-zone digital
air conditioning ............................. 54-57
Programmable heating ................. 58-61
"Hydractive III +" electronic
suspension ...................................... 160
Manual/electronic/automatic Emergency or
gearboxes .......... 137, 139-142, 146-149 assistance call .................. 116, 225-227
Hill start assist ................................. 136 NaviDrive 3D ................................... 229
Parking brake, manual..................... 128 Setting the date/time........................ 261
Parking brake, MyWay ............................................. 273
electric ...................................... 129-135 Setting the date/time........................ 295
Audio system ................................... 305
Setting the date/time........................ 317

328
 VISUAL SEARCH

STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

Fixed centred controls

Lighting ......................................... 88-91 steering wheel .......................... 150-151
- sidelamps/dipped beam headlamps Trip computer ............................... 29-30
- main beam headlamps
Automatic illumination of headlamps..... 90
Daytime running lamps ...................... 90
Automatic rain sensitive wipers ......... 95
Wash-wipe ......................................... 95
Audio system controls ..................... 151

Headlamp adjustment........................ 91

Wipers .......................................... 94-95

Speed limiter............................. 152-153

Cruise control ........................... 154-155
Horn ..................................................116

Steering wheel adjustment ................ 68

329
 VISUAL SEARCH

TECHNICAL DATA - MAINTENANCE

Petrol engines.................................. 209

Petrol weights ........................... 210-211
Diesel engines .......................... 212-213
Diesel weights .......................... 214-217
Commercial versions (Tourer) weights ... 218 Checking components .............. 174-175
Running out of fuel - Diesel ............. 166 Dimensions (Saloon) ................ 219-220 - battery
Dimensions (Tourer) ................. 221-222 - air/passenger compartment filter
Identification markings ..................... 223
- oil filter
- particle emission filter (Diesel)
- brake pads/discs
Very cold climate protection............. 204

Checking the levels .................. 172-173

- oil
- brake fluid Engine compartment
- power steering fluid fuses ................................. 193, 196-197
- coolant
- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid

Changing bulbs......................... 183-192

- front Battery ...................................... 198-199
- rear Energy economy mode.................... 200

Opening the bonnet ......................... 164

Petrol under-bonnet layout ....... 167-168
Diesel under-bonnet layout....... 169-171

330
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

A ABS and EBFD systems ....... 119 A Automatic rain sensitive C Checking the engine oil level...... 40
Accessories ........................... 207 windscreen wipers........... 94, 95 Checks ...........................164-175
Accessory socket, 12 volt ...... 102 Auxiliary sockets ... 256, 292, 314 Children .... 78, 108-115, 123, 125
Adjusting headlamps ............... 91 Child seats ........................... 107
Adjusting head restraints .... 62, 65 B Battery ........................... 174, 198 Child seats, conventional .....109, 110
Adjusting seat belt height ...... 122 Battery, charging ................... 199 CITROËN call button ............. 227
Adjusting the steering wheel ..... 68 Battery, remote control ...... 73, 74 CITROËN services ...... 116, 126, 227
Airbags, curtain ............. 126, 127 Battery compartment Closing the boot ...................... 70
Airbags, front ......................... 127 fuse box............................... 193 Closing the doors .............. 70, 79
Airbags, lateral .............. 126, 127 Blind for panoramic sunroof .... 85 Cold climate screen ............... 205
Air conditioning ...... 24, 50, 51, 54 Blinds .................................... 102 Connectors,
Air conditioning, digital ............ 54 Bluetooth audio ........... 259, 292, 312, 314
Air conditioning, mono-zone .... 51 (hands-free)......... 257, 293, 315 Control for panoramic sunroof
Air diffuser ............................... 49 Bluetooth blind....................................... 85
Air distribution adjustment ..... 52, 55 (telephone) .......... 257, 293, 315 Coolant level ................... 41, 172
Air filter .................................. 174 Bonnet ................................... 164 Coolant
Air flow ................................ 2, 24 Bonnet stay ........................... 164 temperature indicator ............ 41
Air flow adjustment ............ 52, 56 Boot ................................... 81, 82 Courtesy lamps ....................... 96
Air intake ................................. 51 Boot (fittings) ................. 103, 104 Cruise control ........................ 154
Air recirculation ................. 51, 54 Brake discs ............................ 175 Cup holder ..................... 101, 102
Air vents ............................ 49, 50 Brake lamps .................. 187, 189
Alarm ....................................... 75 Brake pads ............................ 175 D Date (display) ........ 261, 295, 317
Alert/warning log ..................... 31 Brakes ................................... 175 Daytime running lamps ..... 90, 183
Alloy wheels .......................... 206 Braking assistance system .... 119 Deactivating the passenger
Anti-lock braking system airbag .................................. 125
(ABS)................................... 119 C Capacity, fuel tank ................... 86 Defrosting .......................... 52, 57
Anti-pinch .................... 77, 84, 85 CD MP3 ......... 253, 290, 291, 311 Demisting .......................... 52, 57
Anti-theft .................................. 71 Central locking .................. 70, 79 Demisting the rear screen .... 53, 57
Armrest, front ........................ 101 Changing Diesel additive level .............. 173
Armrest, rear ......................... 102 a bulb ...........................183-192 Dimensions ........................... 219
Assistance call ...... 116, 226, 227 Changing a fuse .............193-197 Dipped beam ................... 88, 183
Audible warning ..................... 116 Changing a wheel ..........179-182 Dipstick ............................ 40, 172
Audio/video sockets .............. 256 Changing a wiper blade .......... 96 Directional lighting ............. 92, 93
Audio streaming (Bluetooth)..... 316 Changing the date ........ 261, 295, 317 Direction
Audio system ..................305-324 Changing the remote control indicators ............. 116, 183, 189
Automatic illumination of battery ................................... 73 Doors ....................................... 79
headlamps....................... 88, 90 Changing Doors emergency control ........ 80
Automatic operation of hazard the time ............... 261, 295, 317 Driving economically ........... 2, 24
warning lamps ..................... 116 CHECK .................................... 31 Driving positions
Checking levels ............. 172, 173 (storing) ................................. 65
331
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

E EBA (Emergency braking F Fuel tank ........................... 86, 87 I Inflating tyres ................... 24, 223
assistance) .......................... 119 Fusebox, dashboard ............. 193 Inputs for audio
Eco-driving ......................... 2, 24 Fuses .................................... 193 system ......... 256, 292, 312, 314
Economy mode ..................... 200 Instrument panel lighting ......... 42
Electric window controls .......... 77 G G.P.S. ............................ 240, 279 Instrument panels .................... 26
Electronic brake force Gearbox, automatic ....... 146, 175 Instrument panel screen .... 26, 138
distribution (EBFD) .............. 119 Gearbox, electronic ....... 139, 143 Interior mood lighting ............... 98
Electronic Gearbox, ISOFIX
engine immobiliser .......... 71, 74 manual ........ 137, 138, 143, 175 child seats ............ 111, 113, 114
Emergency boot release ......... 81 Gear efficiency indicator ........ 138 ISOFIX mountings ................. 111
Emergency braking system ..... 119 Gear lever ........................... 2, 24
Emergency call ...... 116, 226, 227 Gear lever, J Jack ....................................... 179
Emergency warning lamps .... 116 automatic gearbox............... 146 Jukebox (copy) ...................... 254
Energy economy mode ......... 200 Gear lever, electronic gearbox Jukebox (playing) .................. 255
Engine, Diesel ................. 87, 169 system ................................. 139
Engine, petrol .................. 87, 167 Gear lever, manual gearbox..... 137 K Keeping children
Engine compartment ..... 167, 169 Glove box .............................. 100 safe .............. 108-115, 123, 125
Engine Guidance ....................... 240, 279 Key with
compartment fusebox.......... 196 Guide-me-home .......... 71, 90, 91 remote control ............69-71, 74
Engine
oil level indicator............ 40, 172 H Hands-free kit ................ 293, 315 L Labels, identification .............. 223
Engines ................................. 212 Hazard warning lamps .......... 116 Lamps, warning
Environment ..... 24, 74 , 173, 199 Headlamp adjustment ............. 91 and indicator.....................32-38
ESP/ASR ............................... 120 Headlamps, directional .......91-93 Lane Departure Warning System
Headlamp wash ...................... 95 (LDWS) ............................... 156
F Filling with fuel ................... 86, 87 Headlamp wash reservoir ..... 172 Level, brake fluid ................... 172
Fitting a wheel ....................... 181 Head restraints, front ......... 62, 63 Level, headlamp wash .......... 172
Fitting roof bars ..................... 203 Head restraints, rear ......... 65, 66 Levels and checks ..........167-175
Fittings, boot .................. 103, 104 Heated seats ..................... 62, 64 Lighting .................................... 98
Flashing indicators ................ 116 Heating .................. 24, 50, 51, 55 Lighting,
Foglamps, front ............... 89, 186 Height and reach adjustment, guide-me home........... 71, 90, 91
Foglamps, rear ........ 89, 187, 189 steering wheel ....................... 68 Lighting, interior ....................... 96
Folding the rear seats ............. 66 High load retaining net .......... 105 Lighting bulbs
Front seats .........................62-65 Hill start assist ....................... 136 (replacement) .................183-192
Fuel ............................. 24, 86, 87 Horn ...................................... 116 Lighting control stalk ............... 88
Fuel consumption .................... 24 Hydractive III+ suspension .... 160 Lighting dimmer ....................... 42
Fuel filler cap ........................... 86 Lighting on reminder ............... 89
Fuel filler flap ..................... 86, 87 I Identification plates ............... 223 Loading ................................... 24
Fuel gauge ........................ 41, 86 Indicator lamps, status .......32-38 Load space cover .................. 105
Indicators, direction ............... 116
332
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

L Locating your vehicle .............. 71 P Paint colour code .................. 223 R Replacing the passenger
Locking from the inside ........... 79 Paintwork, matt ..................... 206 compartment filter ............... 174
Panoramic glass sunroof ......... 85 Replacing wiper blades ........... 96
M Main beam ...................... 88, 183 Parking brake ........ 128, 129, 175 Resetting the service indicator ..... 40
Maintenance ............................ 24 Parking brake, electric ........... 129 Resetting the trip recorder ....... 42
Map reading lamps .................. 96 Parking sensors, rear ............ 159 Rev counter ............................. 26
Markings, identification .......... 223 Parking space sensor ........... 157 Reversing lamp ............. 187, 189
Massage function ................... 64 Particle emission filter ..... 173, 174 Roof bars ............................... 203
Mat ........................................ 101 Passenger Routine checks .............. 174, 175
Menu, main ..................... 27, 308 compartment filter ............... 174 Running out of fuel (Diesel)..... 165
Mirror, rear view ................ 67, 68 PIN code ............................... 259
Player, S Safety for children .... 78, 108-115,
Mirrors, door ............................ 67 123, 125
Misfuel prevention ................... 87 CD MP3....... 253, 290, 291, 311
Port, USB ...... 101, 253, 290, 312 Screen, colour 16/9 ...... 235, 262,
Motorway function (direction 276, 297
indicators)............................ 116 Priming the fuel system ......... 165
Protecting children..... 78, 108-115, Screen,
Mountings for ISOFIX seats ..... 111 monochrome ....... 308, 319, 320
MP3 CD ......... 253, 290, 291, 311 123, 125
Puncture ................................ 176 Screen, monochrome C .......... 43
Multifunction screen ................ 43 Screen, multifunction ............... 43
Music media Screen, multifunction (with audio
R Radio ..................... 251, 289, 309
players................. 252, 290, 311 equipment) ...................... 45, 47
Reading lamps, rear ................ 96
MyWay .....................45, 273-304 Screen-wash reservoir .......... 172
Rear demisting .................. 52, 57
Screen menu map ........ 262, 297,
Recharging the battery .......... 199 319, 320
N NaviDrive 3D ............47, 229-271 Reinitialising the electric
Navigation ..................... 240, 279 Screenwash, front ................... 95
windows ................................ 77 Screenwash fluid level .......... 172
Number plate lamps .............. 191 Reinitialising Seat adjustment ................ 62, 63
the remote control ................. 73 Seat belts .......................121-123
O Oil filter .................................. 174 Reinitialising the sunroof ......... 84
Oil level ........................... 40, 172 Seats, rear ............................... 66
Remote control ...................69-74 Security bolts ......................... 182
Oil temperature indicator ......... 41 Removable screen Serial number, vehicle ........... 223
Opening the bonnet ............... 164 (snow shield) ....................... 205 Service indicator ................ 39, 40
Opening the boot ..................... 69 Removing a wheel ................. 181 Servicing ........................... 24, 40
Opening the doors ............. 69, 79 Removing the mat ................. 101 Setting the clock .... 261, 295, 317
Opening the fuel filler flap ....... 86 Repair kit, puncture ............... 176 Short-cut menus .... 236, 277, 278
Opening the panoramic sunroof Replacing Sidelamps ....... 88, 183, 187, 189
blind....................................... 85 bulbs.............................183-192 Side repeater ......................... 187
Opening the sunroof ................ 84 Replacing fuses ..............193-197 SIM card ................................ 259
Operation Replacing the air filter ........... 174 Ski flap .................................. 100
indicator lamps .................32-38 Replacing the oil filter ............ 174 SNOW MOTION .................... 120
333
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

S Spare wheel .......................... 179 T Tools ...................................... 179

Speed limiter ......................... 152 Total distance recorder ............ 42
Speedometer ........................... 26 Towbar ................................... 202
Stability control (ESP) ........... 120 Towing another vehicle .......... 200
Starting the vehicle .......... 72, 139 Traction control (ASR) ........... 120
Steering lock ........................... 72 Traffic information
Steering mounted (TA) ............. 250, 288, 289, 310
controls................ 307, 234, 275 Traffic information
Steering wheel, fixed centred (TMC) .......... 249, 250, 287, 288
controls................................ 150 Trip computer .................... 29, 30
Stopping the vehicle ........ 72, 139 Trip distance recorder ............. 42
Stop & Start .......... 30, 53, 57, 86, Tyre pressures ...................... 223
143, 164, 174, 198, 296, 318 Tyres ................................... 2, 24
Storage compartments .......... 101 Tyre under-inflation
Storing driving positions .......... 65 detection.............................. 117
Stowing rings ......................... 103
Sunroof .................................... 84 U Under-inflation (detection) ..... 117
Sun visor ............................... 100 Unlocking ................................ 69
Suspension, Unlocking from the inside ........ 79
electronic control ................. 160 USB player ............................ 312
Synchronising
the remote control ................. 73 V Vehicle identification .............. 223
System, navigation ........ 240, 279 Ventilation .......................... 49, 50
Systems, ASR and ESP ........ 120 Very cold protection ............... 204
Voice commands ................... 232
T Table of weights ........... 210, 211,
214-218 W Warning lamps ...................32-34
Tables of engines .......... 212, 218 Wash-wipe, rear ...................... 94
Tables of fuses ...................... 193 Weights .......... 210, 211, 214-218
Tank, fuel ................................. 87 Welcome lighting ..................... 98
Technical data ................209-213 Wheel, changing ................... 179
Telephone ...... 227, 257, 293, 314 Window controls ...................... 77
Telephone, hands-free .......... 257 Wiper, rear ............................... 94
Temperature, coolant .............. 41 Wiper control stalk ............. 94, 95
Temperature adjustment ..... 51, 54 Wipers ............................... 94, 95
Temperature control for heated
seats...................................... 64 X Xenon headlamps ................. 183
Temporary tyre repair kit ....... 176
Time ...................... 261, 295, 317
TMC (Traffic info) .......... 249, 287
334
336
This handbook describes all of the equipment Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application
available in the whole range. of the provisions of the European regulation
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of this (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles,
equipment described in this document, depending that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation
on its trim level, version and the specification for the and that recycled materials are used in the
country in which it is sold. manufacture of the products that it sells.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without Reproduction or translation of all or part of this
any obligation. Automobiles CITROËN reserves handbook is prohibited without written authorisation
the right to modify the technical specifications, from Automobiles CITROËN.
equipment and accessories without having to update
this edition of the handbook. For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. workshop that has the technical information,
It should be passed on to the new user in the event competence and equipment required, which a
of sale or transfer. CITROËN dealer is able to provide. Printed in the EU
Anglais
04-11
11.C5.0030
Anglais
2011 – DOCUMENTATION DE BORD
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Edipro

CRÉATIVE TECHNOLOGIE